Skip to main content

Full text of "Television; present methods of picture transmission"

See other formats


TELEVISION 


From  the  collection  of  the 


_    m 

Prelinger 

i     a 

JJibrary 


San  Francisco,  California 
2006 


PRESENT  METHODS  or  PICTURE  TftAMswsstoM 


BY 

H.  HORTON  SHELDON,  PH.D. 

Chairman  of  the  Department  of  Physics,  Washington  Square 

College,  New  York  University;  Science  Editor, 

New  York  Herald  Tribune 

AND 

EDGAR  NORMAN  GRISEWOOD,  M.A. 

Instructor  of  Physics,  New  York  University 


1929 

D.  VAN  NOSTRAND  COMPANY,  INC. 

NEW  YORK 


COPYRIGHT,  1929,  BY 
D.  VAN  NOSTRAND  COMPANY,  IKC. 


All  rights  reserved,  including  that  of  translation 
into  the  Scandinavian  and  other  foreign  languages. 


Printed  in  U.  S.  A. 


PRESS  OF 

BRAUNWORTH  &  CO.,  INC. 

BOOK   MANUFACTURERS 

BROOKLYN,  N.  Y. 


PREFACE 

IN  preparing  a  book  on  Television  one  is  confronted 
with  the  possibility  of  a  revision  before  the  book  is  off  the 
press.  The  kaleidoscopic  manner  in  which  advances  are 
being  made  is,  of  course,  responsible  for  this. 

Nevertheless,  since  the  authors  feel  that  for  the  good 
of  the  subject  a  review  of  the  field  is  at  the  moment  impera- 
tive, they  have  undertaken  this  difficult  task.  At  the  outset, 
and  during  the  preparation  of  the  manuscript,  they  have 
seen  clearly  the  reason  why  no  one  else  in  this  country  has 
ventured  such  a  book  to  date.  They  have  rushed  in  where 
angels  fear  to  tread  in  spite  of  the  condemnation  which  is 
likely  to  fall  upon  their  heads.  The  mass  of  material  which 
could  be  included  in  a  book  of  this  kind  is  enormous  and 
we  have  been  forced  to  use  our  best  judgment  as  to  what 
to  leave  out.  There  will  be  many  to  tell  us  that  we  have 
omitted  material  which  ought  to  have  been  included  and 
included  other  material  which  might  well  have  been  excluded. 
Our  argument  is  that  it  depends  upon  the  point  of  view. 
This,  of  course,  necessitates  an  explanation  of  our  own  view- 
point. We  have  attempted  to  give  a  true  picture  of  the 
state  of  television  to-day  and  to  give  the  reader  the  neces- 
sary background  to  enable  him  to  begin  a  special  study  of 
any  one  feature.  Our  style,  we  hope,  is  also  of  a  sufficiently 
popular  nature  to  enable  the  layman,  or  the  possible  investor, 
to  gain  a  proper  perspective  of  the  subject.  The  book  is  in 
no  sense  a  compendium.  We  have  tried  to  give  credit  where 
credit  is  due  and  to  subdue  the  blatant  claims  of  pretenders 
who  fill  the  daily  press  with  extravagant  statements.  If  in 

iii 


iv  PREFACE 

any  case  we  have  done  an  injustice,  it  has  not  been  in- 
tentional. 

We  have  finished  the  book  without  knowing  what  the 
future  of  television  is  to  be.  Technical  difficulties  make  us 
somewhat  skeptical  yet  past  accomplishments  make  us,  per- 
haps, over  optimistic.  We  believe,  we  have  fairly  curbed 
our  desires  to  prophesy  considering  the  excellent  opportunity 
afforded  by  the  nature  of  the  subject. 

We  hope  that  the  book  will  be  found  useful  and  that 
we  may  later  be  able  to  improve  it  and  keep  it  up-to-date. 
Suggestions  from  readers  will  be  greatly  appreciated. 

We  have  had  much  helpful  cooperation  in  its  prepara- 
tion from  individuals  and  corporations.  Without  them  its 
writing  would  have  been  impossible.  We  are  particularly 
indebted  to  the  following  to  whom  we  extend  our  sincere 
thanks:  J.  L.  Baird,  of  London;  Professor  Arthur  Korn,  of 
Berlin;  Jenkins  Laboratories,  Washington,  D.  C. ;  and  also 
to  the  following  corporations:  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories, 
Case  Research  Laboratory,  Inc.,  General  Electric  Co.,  Radio 
Corporation  of  America,  Raytheon  Manufacturing  Co., 
Westinghouse  Electric  and  Manufacturing  Co.;  and  to  the 
Institute  of  Radio  Engineers. 

With  these  few  words  on  behalf  of  what  is  to  follow; 
we  leave  the  book  to  your  tender  mercies. 

H.  H.  SHELDON 
E.  N.  GRISEWOOD 


CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

INTRODUCTION          .        .        .        .        .       .  .     vii 

I.  ESSENTIAL  ELEMENTS  OF  TELEVISION  AND  PICTURE 

TRANSMISSION       .       .       .       .       .       .       .       .1 

II.  HISTORICAL  BACKGROUND  OF  THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF 

TELEVISION    .       .       •.   .'   .       .       .       .       .       .       5 

III.  OFFICIAL  SYSTEMS  AND  THE  EYE          .       .       .       .     19 

IV.  ELECTROMAGNETIC  WAVES      .       .       .       .       .       .31 

V.  THE   SELENIUM   CELL    .       .       .       .       .       .  .     .     39 

VI.  THE  PHOTOELECTRIC  CELL   .       .       .       .  r.       .     46 

VII.  GLOW  LAMPS   .       .       .     ...       .       .  .       -59 

VIII.  OSCILLOGRAPHS         .       .       .       .       .       .  .       .     71 

IX.  SCANNING          .       .       .       .       *      .       .  .       .     81 

X.  SYNCHRONIZATION    .       .       .  '    ..       .       .  .       .     91 

XI.  TELEPHOTOGRAPHY          .»       .       »".  *.   101 

XII.  THE  BAIRD  TELEVISOR  .       .       .       .       .  .-'     .118 

XIII.  THE  BELL  SYSTEM         .   .    .       ...    .  .       .   132 

XIV.  THE  JENKINS  SYSTEM    .       .       .       ...  .       .    159 

XV.  ALEXANDERSON  SYSTEM  . 166 

XVI.  RELAYS       . 175 

XVII.  AMATEUR  EQUIPMENT 179 

XVIII.  THE  FUTURE  OF  TELEVISION 185 

INDEX 191 


INTRODUCTION 

Who  wants  television?  Will  television  serve  any  useful 
purpose,  become  popular  as  a  source  of  entertainment;  or 
will  it,  having  been  perfected,  serve  a  very  narrow  field? 

Hardly  has  the  talking  movie  made  its  appearance  in  al- 
most every  theatre,  than  we  are  told  that  it  is  a  passing 
fancy,  that  it  will  soon  complete  its  run.  This  is  not  a  novel 
statement;  we  were  told  the  same  thing  about  the  auto- 
mobile, the  airplane  and  the  radio;  but  they  are  still  here. 

Television  is  not  like  collecting  postage  stamps,  an  avoca- 
tion which  may  appeal  to  a  few  or  be  in  vogue  for  a  few 
years  and  then  subside.  It  is  not  like  police  dogs  or  short 
skirts  which  are  for  the  moment  fashionable.  It  is  the  real- 
ization of  a  desire  that  has  existed  in  man  from  his  earliest 
beginnings.  The  automobile,  giving  man  the  speed  he  has 
always  desired,  has  stayed.  The  airplane,  giving  him  the 
wings  he  has  long  sought,  has  stayed.  Television,  giving 
him  the  distant  sight  he  has  longed  for  ever  since,  in  his 
ape-like  form,  he  climbed  to  the  topmost,  swaying  branches 
of  the  tallest  tree  to  look  afar,  is  here  to  stay. 

Seeing  and  hearing  things  at  a  distance  is  as  natural  a 
desire  as  eating.  The  Indian  put  his  ear  to  the  ground  to 
hear  the  approach  of  his  enemies  so  as  to  be  prepared. 
Lookouts  from  high  hills  were  common.  A  great  advance 
in  vision  was  made  by  the  invention  of  the  telescope.  This 
has  been  greatly  improved  up  to  the  present  time;  but  still 
we  are  not  satisfied.  We  want  to  see  more  and  further. 

The  modern  newspaper  is,  after  all,  nothing  more  than 
an  instrument  to  enable  us  to  see  and  hear  more  and  further. 

vii 


viii  INTRODUCTION 

We  can  visualize  from  its  printed  pages  what  has  happened: 
but  would  we  read  the  account  as  written  in  the  newspaper, 
had  we  the  time  and  facilities  to  be  present  at  the  event? 
Television  brings  us  somewhat  nearer  to  a  perfect  realiza- 
tion of  an  event;  wherefore  its  stay  will  be  permanent. 

A  stadium  may  seat  from  seventy  to  one-hundred  thou- 
sand people,  an  auditorium  is  large  if  it  seats  four-thousand, 
a  theatre  is  built  to  accommodate  considerably  less  than  the 
last  named  figure.  Why?  A  theatre  is  built  so  that  all 
may  hear  the  spoken  word,  the  auditorium  is  used  by  a 
symphony  orchestra  which  may  be  heard  at  greater  distances 
than  the  human  voice  and  so  may  be  housed  in  a  larger 
building.  One  comes  to  a  stadium,  however,  to  see;  hence 
it  may  be  made  very  much  larger.  The  attendance  at 
stadiums  is  a  good  guarantee  of  the  success  of  television. 
The  advantage  lies  all  with  the  latter  when  it  is  coupled 
with  radio  so  that  both  eye  and  ear  may  be  satisfied. 

There  are  three  distinct  phases  of  any  message  delivered 
orally.  There  is  the  spoken  word  which  may  be  written  or 
printed  on  paper.  The  statement  that  such  words  may  have 
several  meanings  requires  no  elaboration.  Lawyers  fre- 
quently take  advantage  of  this  to  convey  one  idea  to  a  jury; 
whereas  a  totally  different  conception  might  be  gleaned  from 
the  statement  appearing  on  the  records.  However,  if  we 
know  the  tone  of  voice,  the  accent,  the  pauses  in  such  a  state- 
ment, would  we  know  the  correct  story?  Thus  authors  of 
fiction  write,  "'Villian!'  he  hissed,"  for  the  purpose  of 
conveying  the  idea  of  venom,  even  though  you  cannot  hiss 
such  a  word  if  you  tried.  Or  turning  to  the  heroine,  we 
might  find,  "  'John,'  she  sobbed."  Though  it  is  difficult 
to  sob  such  a  word,  we  get  the  idea.  This  helps,  but  for 
fullest  realization  we  must  see  the  expression  on  the 
heroine's  face  as  well  as  hear  how  she  sobbed  the  word. 
At  this  stage  we  double  or  triple  the  amount  of  information 
the  single  word  "John"  can  convey.  It  is  obvious,  then, 


INTRODUCTION  ix 

that  for  full  comprehension  television  is  essential.  Up  to 
this  point  we  can  only  fill  in  the  details  from  past  experience; 
a  fact  which  accounts  for  our  greater  enjoyment  of  a  radio 
play  when  it  is  one  that  we  have  seen  as  compared  to  one 
that  we  have  not  seen. 

Thinking  of  television  in  its  broadest  sense,  that  is  in- 
cluding the  transmission  of  pictures  by  wire,  there  is  even 
here  an  advantage  over  the  usual  telegraph  message.  Where 
advertisements  are  to  be  duplicated  in  various  cities,  the 
usual  telegraph  message  is  not  sufficient;  only  a  picturegram 
can  convey  the  exact  form.  Where  one  wishes  to  send  a 
message  in,  let  us  say,  Sanskrit,  whose  alphabet  is  not 
familiar  to  the  telegraph  operator,  the  advantage  of  being 
able  to  send  a  picture  of  one's  handwriting  is  apparent.  Such 
service  has  already  become  a  part  of  the  regular  routine  of 
our  large  telegraph  companies.  That  it  is  destined  to  sup- 
plant the  usual  service  with  which  we  are  familiar,  may  not 
at  the  moment  be  obvious.  When  one  realizes,  however, 
it  is  now  possible  to  transmit  a  picture  by  wire  in  less  than 
one  minute,  in  the  laboratory;  there  can  be  little  doubt  that 
putting  such  speed  into  commercial  practice  will  greatly  in- 
crease the  number  of  words  it  is  possible  to  send  over  a 
telegraph  line  in  any  given  time.  The  tedious  ticking  off  of 
the  individual  letters  for  each  word  will  eventually  appear 
as  antiquated  as  an  ox-cart  alongside  a  powerful,  electric 
locomotive. 

If  one  makes  an  inventory,  one  will  soon  discover  that 
there  are  a  number  of  forms  of  entertainment  from  which 
he  is  barred  without  television  in  conjunction  with  his  radio. 
Dancing,  which  forms  such  a  large  part  of  any  musical 
revue,  is  entirely  absent.  This  was  realized  when  one  broad- 
casting station  tried  to  send  over  the  air  a  series  of  Broad- 
way musical  shows,  direct  from  the  stage.  We  feel  sure 
that  no  one  will  deny  this  was  a  failure.  Without  the  stage 
setting,  the  display  of  color  and  dancing,  it  was  lifeless. 


x  INTRODUCTION 

We  have  long  had  movies  without  sound;  today,  they 
are  being  combined.  In  radio  we  now  have  sound  without 
movies;  the  condition  is  rapidly  being  remedied.  When 
this  page  reaches  you,  the  combination  may  have  been 
effected  in  your  home;  as  it  has  been,  for  some  time,  in  the 
laboratory. 

The  radio  expert  or  amateur  who  says  he  is  not  in- 
terested in  the  development  of  television  might  as  well  say 
he  is  not  interested  in  the  three  electrode  vacuum  tube.  Both 
are  part  of  his  business. 

In  this  book  we  have  attempted  to  bring  together,  in  a 
manner  that  can  be  understood  by  all,  a  summary  of  the 
achievements  in  the  field  of  television  together  with  a 
description  of  accessory  equipment.  We  believe,  that  at  the 
time  of  going  to  press,  it  presented  fairly  the  accomplish- 
ments to  date.  We  realize  that  the  next  few  years  will 
bring  a  multitude  of  changes  that  may  at  times  leave  us 
somewhat  behind.  It  is  our  hope,  however,  that  public 
acceptance  of  this  book  will  make  it  possible,  through  fre- 
quent revisions,  to  keep  in  step  with  the  parade.  We  invite 
our  readers  to  assist  us  with  suggestions. 


TELEVISION 

CHAPTER  I 

ESSENTIAL  ELEMENTS  OF  TELEVISION  AND  PICTURE 
TRANSMISSION 

TELEVISION  and  picture  transmission  both  require  that 
the  light  and  shade  of  an  object  or  of  a  picture  be  translated 
into  varying  electrical  impulses.  These  are  transmitted  by 
wire  or  radio  to  their  destination;  where  they  are  changed 
from  the  electrical  form  back  into  the  original  light  and 
shade,  either  to  be  viewed  directly  or  to  be  recreated  into  a 
picture.  To  do  this  there  are  certain  fundamental  steps 
which  are  unavoidable  and  which  differ  only  in  their  method 
of  application.  When  we  fully  understand  these,  we  have 
mastered  the  entire  problem. 

All  modern  television  systems  require,  first  of  all, 
illumination  of  the  object  in  order  that  the  light  and  shade 
used  to  produce  the  picture  may  be  present.  In  the  early 
Baird  experiments,  in  which  the  illumination  covered  the 
entire  subject  at  one  time,  the  heat  and  glare  were  so  great 
that  only  dummies  could  be  used.  Increasingly  sensitive 
apparatus  now  makes  it  necessary  to  use  illumination  no 
greater  than  strong  sunlight.  Most  systems,  however,  do 
not  light  up  the  entire  object  at  once;  but  use  a  narrow  beam 
which  rapidly  traverses  the  object  along  successive  strips. 

Thus,  if  we  were  to  place  a  series  of  parallel  fine  wires 
before  the  object,  the  light  would  follow  the  length  of  each 
of  these  successively.  In  effect  this  same  thing  happens 


2  TELEVISION 

when  the  entire  object  is  illuminated;  for,  although  the  light 
itself  is  unchanged,  the  successive  stripes  are  viewed  in  the 
same  way  by  a  moving  lens  system.  We  may  say  then, 
without  reservation,  that  present-day  scanning,  as  this 
process  is  called,  is  accomplished  by  viewing  successive  por- 
tions of  an  object  along  a  straight  line  and  viewing  the 
consecutive  lines  in  some  convenient  manner.  This  is  not 
at  all  unlike  reading  the  words  on  this  page  along  any  line 
and  then  reading  the  lines  one  after  the  other.  In  this 
manner  the  entire  page  is  covered.  In  an  analogous  way 
every  portion  of  the  surface  of  this  page  would  be  covered 
in  order,  if  being  scanned  for  television  transmission. 

The  lights  and  shadows,  or  variations  of  light,  which 
are  noticed  as  we  pass  over  the  picture  in  this  or  some 
similar  fashion,  must  next  be  changed  into  corresponding 
variations  of  electrical  current.  This  has  presented  the 
greatest  difficulty  in  the  development  of  television  apparatus. 
In  the  first  experiments,  which  promised  success,  the 
selenium  cell  was  used.  Such  cells,  to  be  described  later, 
have  the  peculiarity  of  decreasing  their  resistance  to  the 
flow  of  electrical  current,  in  proportion  to  the  intensity  of 
illumination.  They  are,  however,  temperamental  devices 
having  a  fatigue  effect  which  causes  them  to  fall  off  in 
effectiveness  after  a  short  time  of  continuous  use.  To 
recuperate,  they  must  be  left  in  the  dark.  Also  the  change 
in  resistance  does  not  coincide  with  the  illumination  changes 
but  follows  somewhat  later.  This  peculiarity  is  suitably 
known  as  a  "lag."  For  these  reasons,  the  selenium  cell  did 
not  satisfy  the  requirements  in  its  original  form,  although 
there  are  indications  that  these  faults  may  yet  be  overcome. 

Television  was  really  born  with  the  advent  of  the  photo- 
electric cell.  This  cell  consists  of  two  electrodes,  one  of 
which  is  coated  with  an  oxide  or  a  hydride  of  an  alkali  metal 
— for  example,  caesium  oxide  or  potassium  hydride.  Such 
coatings,  when  illuminated,  give  off  copious  supplies  of  elec- 


ESSENTIAL  ELEMENTS  OF  TELEVISION  3 

trons,  the  number  of  which  is  a  direct  function  of  the  light 
intensity  for  any  given  color.  These  cells  have  no  apparent 
lag  nor  fatigue  although  their  sensitivity  is  not  yet  all  that 
could  be  desired.  When  inserted  as  part  of  a  circuit  they 
give  an  apparent  change  in  resistance  under  illumination; 
although  the  effect  should  not  be  interpreted  as  a  strict 
resistance  change. 


U          SENDING  STATION 

(Courtesy  of  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories.) 
FlG.  i. — A  typical  television  system. 

The  variations  in  current  given  by  either  of  the  above 
devices  are  extremely  small  and  must  be  greatly  magnified 
to  be  transmitted  over  any  distance.  This  is  accomplished 
by  vacuum  tube  amplifiers,  particularly  well  constructed  to 
avoid  distortion.  The  amplified  output  may  be  sent  over 
wires  or  on  modified  carrier  waves,  as  is  done  in  radio  trans- 
mission. In  the  former  case  it  is  received  as  changing  cur- 
rent,— in  the  latter,  by  the  usual  radio  mechanism;  so  that 
if  put  through  a  loud  speaker  it  would  produce  actual  chang- 
ing sounds.  The  picture  would  be  "heard,"  so  to  speak. 

In  either  case  the  next  stage  in  the  procedure  would  be 
to  reconvert  the  electrical  variations  into  light  variations 
similar  to  the  original.  In  the  first  types  of  apparatus  this 
was  done  by  again  amplifying  the  currents  at  the  receiving 
end  and  causing  them  to  actuate  an  electromagnet.  The 


4  TELEVISION 

latter  would  vary  a  slit  width  or  in  some  other  manner 
control  the  amount  of  light  falling  upon  a  sensitive  film  on 
which  the  picture  was  to  be  produced.  This  method  was 
adapted  only  to  picture  transmission.  There  was  no  hint 
of  television;  although  if  it  had  been  physically  possible  to 
have  carried  on  the  operation  with  sufficient  speed  the  pic- 
ture could  have  been  viewed  through  a  translucent  screen. 

To  procure  a  speed  sufficient  for  television,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  obtain  some  method  of  reproduction  free  from  the 
inertia  which  accompanies  a  moving  mass;  a  difficulty  to 
which  all  of  the  mechanical  schemes  were  subject.  The 
introduction  of  the  neon  glow-lamp  solved  this  problem. 
This  lamp  glows  under  a  high  voltage  placed  across  its 
terminals  and  has  so  little  lag  that  it  can  easily  follow  thou- 
sands of  fluctuations  per  second. 

It  is,  of  course,  apparent  that  the  lines  drawn  by  such 
fluctuating  lights  must  always  be  exactly  in  step  with  the 
scanning  operation,  at  the  sending  end.  If  there  is  a  slight 
lag  of  the  one  behind  the  other,  the  picture  will  be  askew. 
This  synchronization  of  the  scanning  with  the  reproduction 
on  the  receiving  drum,  or  in  the  receiving  frame,  has  been 
one  of  the  principal  experimental  difficulties  in  television. 

For  the  transmission  of  a  moving  object,  if  the  image 
is  to  appear  continuous,  the  original  must  be  scanned  com- 
pletely at  least  ten,  preferably  sixteen,  times  per  second. 
This  likewise  is  a  difficult  technical  problem. 

Here  we  have  the  important  features  both  of  picture 
transmission  and  of  television.  The  means  of  accomplishing 
each  particular  step  are  as  varied  as  the  number  of  experi- 
menters. The  purpose  of  the  following  chapters  will  be  to 
consider  some  of  the  best  known  methods  in  greater  detail 
and  to  discuss  the  accessory  apparatus. 


CHAPTER  II 

HISTORICAL  BACKGROUND  OF  THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF 
TELEVISION 

ALTHOUGH  television  is  still  in  its  infancy,  perhaps  not 
yet  well  out  of  the  embryo,  we  must  go  back  over  eighty 
years  to  find  the  earliest  apparatus  for  picture  transmission 
by  electric  currents.  Nor  should  we  feel  that  this  early 
work  was  unimportant  in  the  development  which  has  made 
possible  the  systems  in  use  today. 

In  1847  Bakewell  designed  a  method  for  the  transmis- 
sion of  writing  or  sketches  over  wires;  a  system  not  very 
different  from  one  suggested  some  four  years  earlier  by 
Bain,  but  not  developed  by  him  at  that  time.  The  apparatus 
is  illustrated  diagrammatically  in  Fig.  2. 


FIG.  2. — Bakewell  system. 

The  metal  cylinders  (i)  and  (2),  one  at  each  end  of  a 
telegraph  line,  are  revolved  synchronously.  Over  each 
cylinder  a  metal  stylus  (Sl  and  S2)  describes  a  spiral  path, 
similar  to  that  of  the  needle  in  the  early  Edison  phonograph, 
which  used  cylindrical  records.  Note  that  our  problem  in 
timing  would  be  exactly  the  same  as  requiring  that  two  such 
phonographs,  located  at  a  distance  from  each  other,  and 
playing  the  same  record,  should  sound  a  given  note  at 


6  TELEVISION 

identically  the  same  instant.  This  apparently  could  be  ac- 
complished by  having  the  speed  of  rotation  of  both  cylinders 
identical  and  starting  the  needle  (or  stylus)  at  exactly  the 
same  time. 

If  now  a  design  be  drawn  with  an  insulating  material, 
such  as  shellac,  on  the  sending  cylinder  ( i )  ;  the  telegraph 
circuit  will  be  broken  when  the  stylus  passes  over  this  insula- 
tion, but  closed  again  when  the  stylus  strikes  the  uncoated 
metal.  That  is,  the  current  in  the  line  will  be  intermittent; 
only  flowing  while  stylus  (Si)  is  passing  over  a  portion 
of  its  spiral  path  which  is  not  covered  by  the  design  to  be 
transmitted.  The  problem  then  is  to  make  a  record  on 
cylinder  2  which  will  show  when  current  is  flowing  in  the 
line  as  distinct  from  when  it  is  not. 

This  may  be  accomplished  if  the  receiving  cylinder  be 
covered  with  a  chemically  prepared  paper  such  that  the 
passage  of  an  electric  current  through  the  paper  will  change 
its  color.  For  this  purpose  we  might  saturate  a  piece  of 
porous  paper  with  an  aqueous  solution  of  potassium  fer- 
ricyanide  and  ammonium  nitrate.  In  this  case  we  will  obtain 
a  dark  blue  color  in  portions  through  which  the  current  has 
passed. 

Using  such  a  paper,  it  is  clear  that  if  the  synchronism 
be  exact,  a  negative  of  the  drawing  on  the  transmitter  will 
be  traced  on  the  receiving  cylinder.  That  is  to  say,  the 
paper  will  be  turned  blue  except  when  the  transmitting 
stylus  is  passing  over  the  insulating  material.  Thus  white 
portions  will  correspond  to  the  lines  of  the  drawing  or 
writing  to  be  transmitted.  The  received  diagram  would 
then  appear  like  a  blueprint  made  from  a  line  drawing  on 
tracing  cloth. 

The  movement  of  each  stylus  actually  describes  a  helical 
path,  like  the  thread  of  a  screw,  on  the  cylinder  above 
which  it  moves.  When  the  paper  is  removed  from  the 
cylinder  and  opened  out  flat,  however,  this  path  will  appear 


HISTORICAL  BACKGROUND  OF  THE  DEVELOPMENT      7 


II 

a  b 

FIG.  3.  a — Shows  the  letter  as  it  appears  on 

the  sending  cylinder; 
b — as  it   is   received   in  the  Bakewell 
system. 


as   a  series  of  parallel  lines — their  spacing  depending  on 
the  lead  of  the  stylus  control.     (See  Fig.  3.) 

As  might  be  expected,  the  difficulty  in  obtaining  syn- 
chronism in  the  two  cylinders  militated  against  the  success 
of  the  Bakewell  system.  However,  the  telectograph  used 
commercially  by  T.  Thorne  Baker  for  transmission  of 
pictures  between  London  and  Paris  in  1908  was  funda- 
mentally the  same  as  the  method  described  above.  In  the 
scheme  employed  by 
Fcrree  as  recently  as 
1924,  for  radio  and 
wire  transmission  of 
photographs,  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  early  devel- 
opment described  can 
be  readily  recognized. 

Another  system 
which  was  tried  by  early 
investigators,  notably 
the  French  Post-office 
Engineer,  Charbon- 
nelle,  is  that  of  mak- 
ing the  depth  of  silver  deposit  on  a  photographic  film 
act  as  the  means  of  varying  the  current  in  our  tele- 
graph circuit.  In  order  to  do  this,  the  gelatine  contain- 
ing the  active  silver  salt  must  be  laid  on  a  metal  sheet 
instead  of  on  the  usual  celluloid  or  glass  backing.  On 
exposure,  the  reduction  to  metallic  silver  occurs  at  those 
portions  where  the  greatest  amount  of  light  is  received. 
Now  place  the  negative  on  a  cylinder  so  that  the  metal 
backing  forms  one  terminal  of  the  circuit  and  the  stylus, 
pressing  lightly  on  the  surface,  the  other.  As  the  unreduced 
silver  salt  and  gelatine  are  poor  conductors,  whereas  the 
silver  image  is  good,  it  is  natural  to  expect  the  resistance 
of  the  circuit  to  vary,  being  least  where  the  stylus  is  over 


8  TELEVISION 

those  portions  in  which  the  "printing-out"  or  deposition  of 
silver  is  a  maximum. 

The  fluctuating  current  thus  obtained  might  be  em- 
ployed, as  in  the  instance  previously  described,  to  act  on 
a  chemically  prepared  paper  at  the  receiving  end.  Unfor- 
tunately, however,  experimenters  using  this  scheme  seem 
to  strike  serious  difficulties.  Chief  among  these  difficulties 
is  the  tendency  for  the  flow  of  current  to  follow  the  path 
of  least  electrical  resistance  rather  than  the  shortest 
geometric  path  between  the  stylus  and  the  metal  sheet. 
Hence  the  current  in  the  circuit  at  any  instant  will  not  be 
simply  a  function  of  the  amount  of  silver  deposit;  as  would 
be  necessary  for  an  accurate  reproduction. 

Failing  to  obtain  satisfactory  results  in  transmission 
directly  from  photographic  negatives,  it  was  not  surprising 
that  early  experimenters  should  turn  to  the  half-tone  or 
process-screen  reproductions  used  in  newspaper  work.  Ex- 
amination of  such  a  picture  under  a  magnifying  glass  will 
reveal  that  it  is  composed  of  large  numbers  of  tiny  dots 
of  various  shapes  and  sizes.  In  the  light  portion  of  the 
picture  these  dots  will  be  far  apart;  in  the  dark  portions 
so  close  together  as  to  merge  into  one  another.  The  general 
effect  produced  by  the  ensemble  will  depend  on  how  fine 
grained  a  structure  is  used.  A  picture  composed  of  some 
seventeen-thousand  dots  to  the  square  inch  leaves  little  to 
be  desired;  one  with  only  four-hundred,  will  be  barely  pass- 
able even  when  viewed  at  arms'  length;  the  usual  newspaper 
production  contains  four-thousand  two-hundred  and  twenty- 
five  dots  per  square  inch. 

Suppose  that  we  should  imagine  our  photograph  placed 
on  a  sheet  of  fine  cross-section  paper;  so  that  each  square 
may  be  designated  by  a  letter  and  number  as  is  done  in 
describing  a  chess-board;  or  by  two  numbers,  an  abscissa 
and  ordinate,  as  is  done  in  plotting  charts.  We  then  split 
our  picture  into  a  number  of  small  parts,  each  one  of  which 


HISTORICAL  BACKGROUND  OF  THE  DEVELOPMENT       9 

may  be  transmitted  separately  and  the  whole  reassembled 
according  to  the  designation  of  the  squares.  Such  a  system 
makes  possible  the  simultaneous  transmission  of  different 
portions  of  a  picture  over  separate  wires;  thus  enabling  the 
entire  reproduction  to  be  made  more  rapidly  than  would 
be  the  case  if  only  a  single  wire  were  used.  It  then  remains 
to  find  some  method  for  describing  the  appearance  of  these 
squares.  We  might  use  a  letter  of  the  alphabet  to  indicate 
a  certain  size  and  shape  of  dot  as  used  in  the  half-tone.  In 


FIG.  4. — The  detail  of  the  reproduction  depends  upon  the  number  of  picture 
elements  used  per  unit  area,  (a)  Made  through  a  6o-screen;  e.g.,  3600  ele- 
ments per  square  inch,  (b)  through  a  ico-screen;  e.g.,  10,000  elements  per 
square  inch,  (c)  through  a  ISO-screen;  e.g.,  22,500  elements  per  square  inch. 

this  fashion  the  square  might  be  coded  and  transmitted  like 
a  written  message. 

There  are,  however,  a  great  many  objections  to  be  over- 
come. To  obtain  a  good  reproduction,  a  great  many  sizes 
and  shapes  of  dots  must  be  used,  making  coding  a  long  and 
difficult  process.  H.  G.  Bartholomew  and  M.  L.  D.  Mc- 
Farlane,  in  England,  have  removed  the  necessity  of  a  human 
observer  having  to  assign  code  letters  to  the  various  parts 
of  the  picture.  Their  device  not  only  automatically  codes 
the  picture;  but  also  perforates  a  tape  which  may  be  run 
through  the  ordinary  telegraph  or  wireless  transmitter. 
Here  the  problem  is  somewhat  simplified  by  using  only  six 
color  variations  from  white  to  black  to  describe  a  given 


io  TELEVISION 

portion  of  the  original.  This  method,  which  is  known  as 
the  Bartlane  process,  will  be  described  in  more  detail  in 
a  later  chapter. 

L.  J.  Leishman  also  has  devised  a  method  of  trans- 
mitting a  half-tone  without  the  necessity  of  coding.  The 
system  is  not  so  very  different  from  that  described  as  un- 
satisfactory when  applied  to  the  usual  latent  image  in  silver. 
Here,  however,  the  picture  is  first  photographed  through 
a  process  screen,  the  function  of  which  is  to  split  the  original 
into  dots  of  varying  sizes.  A  positive  is  then  made  from 
this  negative.  The  positive  is  formed  on  a  copper  or  zinc 
plate  covered  with  a  mixture  of  gelatine  and  ammonium 
dichromate.  The  dichromate  is  rendered  insoluble  by  the 
action  of  light;  so  that  after  washing,  only  those  portions 
of  the  copper  plate  corresponding  to  the  dark  parts  of  the 
original  will  be  covered  with  the  gelatine  and  dichromate. 
After  heating,  these  portions  become  an  excellent  thin  in- 
sulation over  the  surface  of  the  plate.  The  reproduction 
in  Leishman's  system  is  accomplished  by  a  stylus  actuated 
by  electromagnets.  Both  transmitter  and  receiver  employ 
cylinders  above  which  a  needle  moves  much  as  described 
in  the  Bakewell  method.  The  reproduction,  however,  may 
be  made  by  the  mechanical  movement  of  the  recording 
needle  without  the  medium  of  a  chemically  treated  paper. 
One  way  in  which  this  can  be  done  is  to  allow  the  stylus 
to  strike  a  carbon  sheet  placed  over  the  paper  on  which 
the  drawing  or  photograph  is  to  be  received. 

The  work  of  Edouard  Belin,  a  French  inventor,  illus- 
trates still  another  treatment  of  the  problem,  which  has 
been  successfully  used  by  not  a  few  experimenters.  He 
made  use  of  a  picture  formed  in  relief  on  the  sending 
cylinder.  The  displacement  of  a  needle  passing  in  a  close 
spiral  path  over  this  irregular  surface  is  made  to  produce 
fluctuations  in  the  line  current.  In  an  early  form,  demon- 
strated over  a  Paris-Lyons  telephone  line  in  1907,  this  was 


HISTORICAL  BACKGROUND  OF  THE  DEVELOPMENT      n 

done  by  amplifying  the  movement  of  the  stylus  by  a  lever, 
the  far  end  of  which  moved  over  a  device  for  varying  the 
resistance  in  the  circuit.  A  serious  objection  to  such  an 
arrangement  lies  in  the  fact  that  to  produce  such  an  am- 
plified movement  a  considerable  force  must  be  exerted  by 
the  stylus;  this  causes  cutting  of  the  gelatine  relief  used 
for  transmission.  Later  Belin  improved  the  transmission 
by  connecting  the  stylus  to  a  microphone  in  the  primary 
circuit  of  a  transformer,  the  secondary  of  which  was  in  the 
transmission  line.  This  is  readily  recognized  as  similar  to 
the  ordinary  telephone  transmitter,  except  that  the  move- 
ments of  the  stylus,  as  it  passes  over  the  relief  image,  have 
replaced  the  condensations  and  rarefactions  of  sound  waves. 

The  receiving  portion  of  the  Belin  apparatus  introduces 
a  method  markedly  different  from  any  hitherto  mentioned. 
The  varying  currents  are  received  on  a  Blondel  oscillograph, 
an  instrument  in  which  the  variation  of  current  is  measured 
by  the  displacement  of  a  beam  of  light  reflected  from  a 
mirror  rigidly  fixed  to  the  suspension.  The  reflected  light 
then  passes  through  a  wedge-shape  aperture,  called  by  Belin 
a  "scale  of  tints" ;  thence  through  a  condensing  lens  onto 
a  sensitized  film  which  is  carried  by  a  rotating  cylinder 
synchronized  with  the  sending  cylinder.  It  will  be  noted 
that  here  we  are  using  the  current  in  our  circuit  to  vary  the 
amount  of  light  from  a  constant  source  which  reaches  a 
given  portion  of  the  film.  Thus,  the  inertia  of  the  receiving 
mechanism  has  been  greatly  reduced,  a  major  achievement 
since  speed  of  reproduction  is  all-important. 

Turning  now  to  the  method  of  Professor  Arthur  Korn 
of  the  Berlin  Technical  High  School,  we  find  the  selenium 
cell  used  at  the  transmitter.  The  photographic  film  is  placed 
on  a  glass  cylinder  which  rotates  and  at  the  same  time 
moves  along  parallel  to  its  axis.  Hence  by  keeping  a  small 
point  of  light  in  a  fixed  position,  it  may  be  made  to  traverse 
every  portion  of  the  film.  The  light,  having  passed  through 


11 


TELEVISION 


the  translucent  film,  is  allowed  to  fall  upon  a  selenium  cell, 
connected  in  the  usual  telegraph  circuit.  Selenium  possesses 
the  property  of  becoming  more  conductive  for  electricity 
under  the  influence  of  light.  Therefore  the  resistance  of 
the  circuit  at  any  time  will  be  proportional  to  the  darkness 
of  that  part  of  the  film  then  under  illumination.  Clearly, 
in  order  to  obtain  the  desired  current  variation,  the  source 
of  light  and  the  electromotive  force  acting  in  the  line  must 
both  be  constant.  At  the  receiving  end,  a  modification  of 
the  galvanometer  scheme  employed  by  Belin  is  used. 

At  first  glance,  it  would  appear  that  in  this  system  the 
inertia  effect  has  been  reduced  to  a  minimum  since  neither 


TIME. 


FIG.    5. — Comparison   of   the  fluctuation   of   light   intensity    (solid   line)    and 

conductivity  of   a   typical   selenium   cell    (dotted   line).     Note   time   lag   and 

rounding  of  conductivity  curve. 

transmitter  nor  receiver  depend  upon  the  movement  of  a 
stylus  having  mass.  Unfortunately,  however,  the  selenium 
cell  is  subject  to  a  distinct  lag — it  does  not  respond  instantly 
to  light  fluctuation.  The  accompanying  diagram  shows 
this  effect  quite  clearly.  Professor  Korn  has  very  in- 
geniously corrected  this  difficulty  by  the  use  of  two  cells 
arranged  to  compensate  for  each  other.  Nevertheless,  con- 
siderable trouble  still  exists  in  the  selection  of  suitable  cells. 
It  is  for  this  reason  that  the  selenium  cell  has  been  almost 
completely  replaced  by  the  photoelectric  cell,  as  we  shall 
consider  later. 


HISTORICAL  BACKGROUND  OF  THE  DEVELOPMENT      13 

Up  to  this  point  we  have  considered  only  the  problem 
of  picture  transmission  over  wires.  The  wireless  or  radio 
transmission,  however,  presents  the  same  fundamental  prob- 
lems— the  production  of  current  or  potential  variations 
from  the  original  and  their  reception  so  as  to  give  an  ac- 
curate reproduction.  When  using  a  system  of  the  inter- 


(Courtesy  of  Arthur  Korn.) 

FIG.  6. — Picture  of  President  Fallieres  sent  by  wire  from  Berlin  to  Paris  in 
1907  by  Korn  system.    Time  required,  12  minutes.     (Note  the  structure.) 

mittent  current  type  as  previously  discussed,  the  introduction 
of  a  tuned  spark-gap  is  all  that  need  be  considered  in  order 
to  understand  the  early  attempts  at  wireless  transmission. 
A  coherer  was  employed  in  the  receiving  circuit.  The  prob- 
lem of  synchronization  becomes  even  more  complex  with 
the  lack  of  direct  wire  connection  between  the  two  stations. 


(Courtesy  of  Arthur  Korn.) 

FIG.   7. — Examples  of   pictures   transmitted   over   wires  by   the    Lorenz-Korn 

method   in    1928.     A   photoelectric   cell   is   used   at  the   sender   and   a   string 

galvanometer  at  the  receiver.    Time  required,  il/2  minutes. 

14 


HISTORICAL  BACKGROUND  OF  THE  DEVELOPMENT     15 

Hans  Knudson  achieved  some  success  in  wireless  trans- 
mission of  pictures  over  short  distances  as  early  as  1908, 
despite  the  inherent  difficulties  of  the  spark  gap  and  coherer. 


(Courtesy  of  Arthur  Korn.) 

FIG.  8. — Examples  of  wireless  transmission  by  the  Lorenz-Korn  method,  1928. 

Time,  i  minute. 

He  used  a  relief  line-process  original  and  transmitted  di- 
rectly without  coding.      Professor  Korn  also  adapted  the 


1 6  TELEVISION 

system  described  briefly  above  to  wireless  transmission.  This 
he  demonstrated  in  1914.  In  this  case  it  was  found  neces- 
sary to  code  the  original.  A  step  performed  automatically 
by  a  sensitive  relay  operated  by  the  current  fluctuation  in 
the  selenium  cell  circuit.  The  perforated  tape  made  by  this 
relay  could  be  translated  into  code  letters,  each  one  of 
which  designated  a  shade  (or  process  dot — in  shape  and 
size)  ;  and  transmitted  like  any  radio  message.  To  facilitate 
reproduction  a  special  typewriter  was  designed  in  which  the 
type  attached  to  a  given  key  was  a  tiny  square  of  the  correct 
shade  (or  correct  process  dot)  for  that  code  letter. 

A  number  of  other  code  systems  such  as  the  Bartlane, 
mentioned  previously,  are  readily  adaptable  to  radio  trans- 
mission— provided  the  problem  of  synchronization  can  be 
solved. 

The  introduction  and  development  of  the  three-electrode 
vacuum  tube  resulted  in  such  a  simplification,  both  in  the 
transmission  and  reception  of  radio  signals,  as  to  completely 
replace  the  spark-gap  and  coherer.  This  is  as  true  in  the 
field  of  picture  transmission  as  in  sound  broadcasting.  So 
it  is  that  we  find  the  vacuum  tube  oscillator  employed  in  the 
systems  of  C.  F.  Jenkins  of  Washington,  D.  C,  and  R.  H. 
Ranger  of  the  Radio  Corporation  of  America;  both  of 
which  will  be  discussed  in  later  chapters. 

The  progress  made  in  radio  transmission  of  pictures 
since  the  advent  of  the  vacuum  tube  has  been  extremely 
rapid.  On  December  2,  1924,  pictures  were  "radioed" 
from  London  to  New  York,  using  Captain  Ranger's 
method.  The  system  is  now  established  and  commercial 
service  maintained  between  the  Radio  House,  the  Marconi 
telegraph  station  of  London,  and  the  R.  C.  A.  in  New  York 
City. 

Let  us  turn  now  to  the  problem  of  transmission  of  pic- 
tures of  moving  objects,  generally  referred  to  as  televison. 
As  the  eye  will  not  hold  a  discrete  impression  of  pictures 


HISTORICAL  BACKGROUND  OF  THE  DEVELOPMENT     17 

presented  at  the  rate  of  sixteen  per  second;  it  follows  that, 
if  a  moving  object  be  photographed  every  sixteenth  of  a 
second  and  these  separate  images  projected  before  the  eye, 
sixteen  each  second,  the  impression  will  be  one  of  continuous 
motion.  This  is  then  the  problem  of  television. 

Little  has  been  said  so  far  about  the  time  required  for 
transmission.  In  the  Bell  Telephone  system,  one  of  the  most 
recent  for  wire  transmission,  a  5  x  7  inch  photograph  in  100 
lines  to  the  inch  (equivalent  to  100,000  dots  per  square  inch) 
requires  seven  minutes  for  transmission.  Any  code  method 
such  as  those  previously  described  will  of  necessity  require 
a  much  longer  time.  It  becomes  apparent  that  much  more 
rapid  reproduction  is  imperative.  For  this  reason  apparatus 
of  negligible  inertia  will  be  required  both  for  transmission 
and  reception. 

Early  experimenters  in  the  field  attempted  to  use  the 
selenium  cell.  The  first  suggestions  being  to  allow  the  light 
from  a  small  section  of  the  original  to  fall  on  a  cell  con- 
trolling the  current  for  a  light  which  illuminated  the  cor- 
responding portion  of  the  reception  screen.  Enough  such 
circuits  must  be  used  to  cover  the  entire  object  to  be  trans- 
mitted. Although  direct  enough,  this  system  is  certainly 
quite  complicated  for  the  transmission  of  any  but  an  ex- 
tremely simple  picture. 

Ruhmer  in  Germany  as  early  as  1910  accomplished  a 
remarkable  simplification  of  the  elementary  method  sug- 
gested above.  He  used  only  twenty-five  square  sections  in  his 
transmission  and  reception  board,  so  that  only  simple  geo- 
metric figures  could  be  handled.  In  place  of  twenty-five  dif- 
ferent wires  from  sender  to  receiver,  however,  he  employed 
only  one.  Each  square  actuated  a  separate  selenium  cell;  this 
cell  controlled  a  circuit  of  definite  frequency.  At  the  recep- 
tion end  a  relay  responsive  only  to  this  frequency  illuminated 
an  electric  bulb  placed  behind  the  corresponding  square  of 
the  screen.  When  a  number  of  squares  of  the  sending  board 


1 8  TELEVISION 

are  illuminated  a  number  of  different  frequency  pulses  will 
be  sent  over  the  line  without  interference  and  the  cor- 
responding relays  will  be  actuated,  thus  lighting  the  correct 
squares  on  the  reception  board. 

As  intimated  previously,  the  lag  of  the  selenium  cell 
presents  a  considerable  difficulty,  hence  it  has  been  sup- 
planted by  the  photoelectric  cell  and  the  cathode  ray  oscillo- 
graph in  more  recent  developments.  Even  in  1908,  A.  A. 
Campbell-Swinton  suggested,  in  a  letter  to  "Nature"  that 
the  problem  might  be  solved  by  the  use  of  the  Braun  tube, 
or  cathode  ray  oscillograph.  Several  workers  have  since 
followed  along  these  lines;  notably  Professor  Belin  and  M. 
Dauvellier  in  France. 

In  America  the  photoelectric  cell  seems  to  have  at- 
tracted more  attention.  We  find  it  utilized  by  C.  F.  Jenkins 
in  the  transmitter  used  by  him  in  June,  1925,  when  he  suc- 
ceeded in  projecting  on  a  small  screen,  in  his  laboratory  in 
Washington,  D.  C.,  an  image  of  the  rotating  arms  of  a 
windmill;  the  arms  of  the  original  were  turning  nearly  five 
miles  away  in  Anacostia,  Md.  At  the  receiving  end  a 
refinement  of  the  neon  tube  due  to  D.  MacFarlane  Moore 
was  used. 

For  a  clear  understanding  of  these  more  recent  systems 
of  television  it  is  essential  that  one  know  something  of  the 
construction  and  characteristics  of  some  of  the  more  im- 
portant parts  used — the  photoelectric  cell,  the  neon  lamp, 
the  cathode  ray  oscillograph,  the  scanning  disk,  optical  sys- 
tems, etc.  The  purpose  of  the  following  chapters  will  be 
to  discuss  each  of  these  devices  in  detail.  The  theoretical 
background  necessary  for  an  understanding  of  the  apparatus 
will  also  be  treated  briefly. 


CHAPTER  III 
OPTICAL  SYSTEMS  AND  THE  EYE 

IN  the  study  of  television  one  is  constantly  confronted 
with  optical  systems.  There  is  the  optical  system  which 
produces  the  scanning  pencil  or  which  collects  the  light  rays 
reflected  from  the  scene  at  the  sending  end,  and  the  projec- 
tion system  for  throwing  the  image  on  a  screen  at  the  re- 
ceiving end.  Lenses,  mirrors,  and  prisms  have  a  habit  of 
making  themselves  useful  in  what  sometimes  appears  to  be 
the  most  unexpected  ways,  as  in  the  Jenkins  scanning  disc 
for  example.  These  are  the  tools  with  which  we  control 
light  beams,  and  as  this  control  is  an  essential  element  of 
television  it  is  necessary  that  we  know  something  of  it.  For 
this  study  we  need  know  nothing  of  the  fundamental  nature 
of  light  and  this  is  left  for  a  later  chapter.  We  are  here 
concerned  only  with  its  behavior  in  relation  to  optical 
systems. 

One  of  the  first  laws  of  geometrical  optics  concerns  it- 
self with  the  rectilinear  projection  of  light.  This  law  states 
that  light  travels  in  straight  lines  in  any  homogeneous 
medium,  that  is  a  medium  which  is  the  same  throughout. 
The  second  important  law  is  that  the  intensity  of  illumina- 
tion from  an  open  point  source  falls  off  inversely  as  the 
square  of  the  distance  from  the  source.  Thus  if  the  distance 
of  a  lamp  from  an  object  is  doubled  the  intensity  of  illumina- 
tion of  the  object  is  cut  to  one-fourth  of  its  former  value; 
if  tripled  in  distance  the  intensity  is  cut  to  one-ninth  and 
so  on.  If  the  source  is  enclosed,  as  in  a  reflector,  this  law 
does  not  hold  and  the  rate  of  falling  off  will  then  depend 

19 


20 


TELEVISION 


upon  the  reflector.  It  is  not  true  for  a  source  other  than 
a  point,  but  if  the  object  is  removed  a  distance  which  is 
twenty  times  the  diameter  of  the  source  or  further,  the  error 
introduced  by  considering  it  a  point  is  less  than  one  per  cent. 
For  most  practical  purposes  the  law  is  nearly  enough  correct 
for  satisfactory  application.  In  illuminating  an  object  for 
television  it  should  not  be  lost  sight  of. 

Reflection  of  light  is  an  important  point  in  television. 
For  a  mirror  there  is  a  law  which  states  that  the  angle  of 
incidence  is  equal  to  the  angle  of  reflection.  Thus  in 
Fig.  9,  the  angle  i  equals  the  angle  r.  This  law  may 


FIG.  9. — For  a  mirror  the  angle  of  incidence  (i)   of  a  light  beam  is  equal  to 
the  angle  of  reflection  (r). 

be  accepted  wherever  a  polished  metallic  surface  is  con- 
sidered, but  it  does  not  hold  true  for  any  but  well  polished 
surfaces.  A  comparatively  rough  surface  which  is  white, 
as  a  piece  of  white  blotting  paper,  may  reflect  more  light 
than  polished  nickel  and  in  general  will  do  so:  this  is  also 
true  of  mat  white  card-board  or  white  cotton,  etc.  This 
reflection  however  does  not  obey  the  law  given  above,  but 
rather  Lambert's  cosine  law.  The  later  law  is  best  under- 
stood by  reference  to  Fig.  10,  where  the  arrows  ending 
on  the  circle  represent  the  amount  of  light  which  comes  off 
at  each  angle.  Such  a  surface  is  called  a  diffusely  reflecting 
surface,  whereas  the  mirror  is  called  a  specularly  reflecting 
surface.  In  properly  illuminating  a  subject  to  be  televised 


OPTICAL  SYSTEMS  AND  THE  EYE  21 

the  choice  of  reflectors  is  important:  but,  in  general,  diffusing 
screens  would  be  used.  These  screens  are  much  used  in 
photograph  galleries  and  their  use  is  no  less  essential  in 
television  studios. 

The  fourth  fundamental  law  of  geometrical  optics  is 
that  of  refraction.  This  has  to  do  with  the  passage  of 
light  from  one  medium  to  another  as  from  air  to  glass  or 
from  air  to  water,  etc.  Dipping  a  pencil  at  an  incline  into 
water  and  viewing  it  from  above  will  show  that  it  appears 
to  be  bent  where  it  enters  the  surface.  The  amount  of 
bending  depends,  it  has  been  found,  on  the  relative  speed 


FIG.  10. — In  the  case  of  a  diffusing  surface  reflection  follows  Lambert's  cosine 

law.     This  is  shown  above  where  the  length  of  arrow  represents  the  amount 

of  light  reflected  in  any  chosen  direction. 

of  light  in  the  two  media  considered.  It  is  this  property  of 
refraction  which  makes  lenses  possible. 

Perhaps  the  simplest  optical  device  is  the  plane  mirror, 
of  which  it  need  only  be  said  that  the  image  appears  to  be 
as  far  behind  the  mirror  as  the  object  is  in  front.  Since  no 
rays  of  light  actually  penetrate  the  mirror,  no  rays  actually 
exist  where  the  image  appears  to  be.  Such  an  image  is 
called  a  virtual  image. 

When  we  come  to  curved  mirrors,  however,  we  have 
quite  a  different  story,  and  one  which  is  not  so  simple.  If 
we  consider  a  concave  mirror  as  shown  in  Fig.  1 1 ;  a  ray 
marked  A  striking  it  as  indicated,  will  be  reflected  according 
to  the  reflection  law,  for  the  ray  is  so  small  that  the  part 


22  TELEVISION 

of  the  mirror  which  it  strikes  appears  flat  from  its  point  of 
view.     The  ray  B  will  likewise  be  reflected  as  shown. 

The  point  at  which  the  rays  cross,  F,  is  called  the  focus 
and  if  the  mirror  has  been  drawn  with  a  compass  it  will  be 

A  \ 


FIG.  ix. — Diagram  of  a  concave  mirror  showing  path  of  light  rays,  the  focal 
point  F,  and  the  center  of  curvature  of  the  mirror  at  C. 

found  that  F  is  halfway  between  the  center  of  curvature 
and  the  mirror. 

Now,  the  useful  images  which  we  will  get  from  mirrors 
of  this  type  are  of  three  kinds : 

1.  The  object  is  to  the  left  of  the  center  of  curvature. 
Fig.  i2a. 

2.  The  object  is  between  the  center  of  curvature  and 
the  focus.     Fig.  i2b. 

3.  The   object   is   between   the    focus   and   the   mirror. 
Fig.  i2c. 

Wherever  the  image  and  object  are  on  the  same  side 
of  the  mirror  the  light  rays  actually  pass  through  the  image 
and  it  is  called  a  real  image.  If  they  are  on  opposite  sides 
the  image  is  virtual,  as  in  the  plane  mirror.  Formulas  may 
be  given  so  that  the  exact  position  of  image  and  object  may 
be  located  mathematically;  but  readers  are  referred  to  text- 
books on  optics  for  this  information. 

In  television,  lenses  are  more  important  than  mirrors 


OPTICAL  SYSTEMS  AND  THE  EYE 


7\ 

FIG.  iza. — The  position  of  the  image  and  its  size  with  respect  to  the  object 
when  the  object  is  beyond  the  center  of  curvature  is  shown  above. 


f 

FIG.  izb. — When  the  object  is  between  the  center  of  curvature  and   the 
focus,  the  image  takes  a  position  outside  the  center  of  curvature. 


^^> -»•*"*  A 


FlG.  12C. — If  the  object  is  between  the  focus  and  the  mirror,  the  image  is 
virtual.    It  appears  to  be  behind  the  mirror. 


24  TELEVISION 

although  they  behave  in  much  the  same  manner.  Here 
parallel  rays,  instead  of  being  reflected  to  the  focus,  are 
refracted  as  shown  in  Fig.  13.  Fig.  14  shows  the 
relative  location  of  image  and  object  for  one  position  of  the 


FIG.  13. — The  diagram  above  shows  the  path  of  parallel   rays  which  after 

refraction  by  the  lens  pass  through  the  focus.     C  is  the  center  of  curvature 

for  one  face  of  the  lens. 


FIG.   140. — The  above  is  typical  of  the  position  of  object  and   image   for  a 

double  convex  lens  when  the  object  is  outside  the  focus.    This  will  be  the  case 

in  most  television  apparatus. 


FIG.    i4#. — For   a   double  concave  lens  the    image   is   between   the    lens   and 
focus  when  the  object  is  outside  the  focus.    The  image  is  virtual. 

object.  This  is  typical  as  long  as  the  object  is  not  between 
the  focus  and  the  lens.  In  the  case  of  convex  lenses  the 
image  is  real  when  it  is  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  lens  from 
the  object  and  virtual  when  it  is  on  the  same  side. 


OPTICAL  SYSTEMS  AND  THE  EYE  25 

As  the  double  convex  lens  is  almost  always  used  in  tele- 
vision for  producing  real  images,  the  method  of  choosing 
a  lens  for  this  case  only  will  be  given.  This  is  based  on 
the  formula: 

i. ill 

t  ~p+q 

where  /  is  the  focal  length,  p  is  the  object  distance  and  q  is 
the  image  distance.  The  focal  length  of  any  lens  can  be 
quickly  found  by  holding  it  up  toward  the  sun  and  finding 
where  it  casts  its  light  spot.  This  is  not  accurate,  but  is  good 
enough  for  most  purposes.  From  this  formula  one  can 
determine  distances  and  dimensions  necessary  in  the  con- 
struction of  television  apparatus. 

Several  things  about  the  choice  of  a  lens  are  worth 
noting.  The  greater  the  diameter  of  the  lens  and  the 
shorter  its  focus  the  greater  its  light  collecting  ability.  A 
short  focus  lens  has  what  is  called  a  flat  field.  It  is  said 
to  have  no  "depth  of  focus,"  and  an  object  has  to  be  moved 
only  slightly  to  be  thrown  in  or  out  of  focus.  A  person's 
nose  might  be  sharply  in  focus  but  his  cheeks  blurred  in  such 
an  extreme  case.  The  farther  we  get  from  this  condition 
the  less  light  we  collect  but  the  more  pleasing  the  view.  In 
television,  light  collection  is  frequently  the  major  considera- 
tion, consequently  such  lens  are  not  uncommon. 

When  one  is  using  a  photoelectric  cell,  sensitive  mainly 
in  the  violet,  or  when  the  image  is  to  be  photographed,  the 
available  light  is  increased  by  use  of  quartz  lenses;  for  these 
transmit  the  ultra-violet  rays  of  high  actinic  value. 

One  must  also  watch  for  various  lens  faults.  One  of 
these  is  spherical  aberration,  a  fault  which  causes  a  blurred 
image,  as  rays  from  the  outside  part  of  the  lens  focus  closer 
to  it  than  those  from  the  center.  (Fig.  15.)  Another  is 
chromatic  aberration,  which  is  the  focusing  of  different  colors 
at  different  distances  from  the  lens,  the  red  farthest  from 


26 


TELEVISION 


it  and  the  violet  nearest.  (Fig.  16.)  Some  lenses  also 
give  "pin-cushioned"  distortion,  others,  "barrel-shaped" 
distortion.  Others  have  astigmatism,  the  focus  across  one 
axis  being  different  from  that  across  another;  they  are  not 
symmetrical  .  .  .  and  so  the  number  of  possible  faults 
goes  on.  To  correct  for  such  faults  good  lenses  are  usually 


FIG.  15. — Rays  from  the  outer  edge  of  a  simple  lens  whose  surfaces  are 

spherical  focus  closer  to  the  lens  than  those  through  the  center  portion. 

This  gives  a  blurred  image. 

made  up  of  two  or  more  pieces  each  of  a  different  kind  of 
glass.  With  these  pieces  all  common  faults  can  be  corrected. 
While  one  should  be  careful  in  selecting  lenses  if  good 
results  are  expected,  it  should  be  remembered  that  good 
selection  implies  a  knowledge  of  when  to  use  a  cheap  lens 
as  well  as  when  to  use  a  good  one.  It  would  be  foolish,  for 

A 


FIG.  16. — Different  colors  will  focus  different  distances  from  the  lens  unless  it 

has  been  specially  corrected  for  this  fault  by  being  made  up  of  different  kinds 

of  glass  cemented  together. 

example,  to  put  an  expensive  lens  in  a  spot-light,  where  none 
of  the  faults  enumerated  above  would  have  any  importance. 
Before  choosing,  one  should  make  a  careful  study  of  the 
needs — one  would  not  choose  an  expensive  limousine  to  haul 
gravel. 


OPTICAL  SYSTEMS  AND  THE  EYE 


27 


The  prism  is  another  optical  device  which  may  at  times 
prove  useful.     This  has  the  ability  to  bend  light  as  shown 
Fig.   17,  the  red  being  bent  least  and  the  violet  most. 


in 


FIG.  17. — A  glass  prism  breaks  white  light  up  into  component  colors,  the  red 
being  bent  least,  the  violet  most,  as  shown. 

The  prism  has  another  interesting  use,  that  is  as  a  perfect 
mirror.  As  rays  of  light  come  from  an  object  under  water, 
for  example,  they  are  bent  more  and  more  toward  the 
surface  as  the  angle  changes,  finally  being  reflected  back  into 


FIG.  18. — A  right-angled  glass  prism  may  be  used  as  a  perfect  reflector  if 
light  is  allowed  to  strike  it  as  shown. 

the  water.  Beyond  the  critical  angle  the  reflection  is  com- 
plete, and  is  known  as  internal  reflection.  If  light  is  sent 
in  on  one  side  of  a  right-angle  prism,  as  shown  in  Fig.  18, 


28  TELEVISION 

it  will  strike  the  oblique  side  at  such  an  angle  as  to  be  wholly 
reflected  and  so  the  prism  acts  as  a  perfect  mirror.  Prisms 
are  for  this  reason  much  used  in  binoculars,  range- 
finders,  etc. 

One  optical  instrument  which  enters  into  all  television 
systems  is  the  human  eye  and  since  all  systems  must  adapt 
themselves  to,  and  may  take  advantage  of  its  characteristics, 
it  is  essential  that  we  know  something  about  the  manner  in 
which  it  functions.  When  the  light  enters  the  normal  eye 
it  is  focused  by  means  of  the  eye-lens  onto  the  retina.  The 
retina  is  coated  with  a  material  known  as  the  visual-purple 
in  which  are  imbedded  the  so-called  rods  and  cones  at  the 
nerve  ends.  When  the  light  falls  upon  the  visual-purple,  a 
photoelectric  action  takes  place,  according  to  the  generally 
accepted  Eldridge-Green  theory,  the  electrons  being  freed 
much  as  they  are  in  a  photoelectric  cell.  These  freed  elec- 
trons set  up  currents  in  the  visual-purple  which  are  detected 
by  the  rods  and  cones;  these  in  turn  set  up  currents  in  the 
nerves  that  carry  them  to  the  brain.  The  detection  of  the 
current  in  the  visual-purple  by  the  rods  and  cones,  and  its 
production  of  secondary  currents  in  the  nerves,  reminds  one 
of  the  action  of  a  vacuum  tube  circuit.  The  nerves  are  the 
wires  which  carry  the  message  to  the  brain.  The  eye  inter- 
prets different  wave-lengths  as  color. 

There  are  several  features  of  the  eye  which  cannot  be 
ignored  in  planning  television  apparatus.  For  best  seeing 
conditions,  the  illumination  level  should  not  be  too  high.  One 
to  one-hundred  foot-candles  are  advisable  limits.  It  is 
also  advisable  to  keep  the  contrast  between  different  parts 
in  the  ratio  of  about  ten  to  one.  A  ratio  of  one-hundred 
to  one  will  produce  a  glare.  The  color  for  best  vision  is 
in  the  yellow-green  region.  When  the  diameter  of  an  object 
being  viewed  is  more  than  one-twentieth  its  distance  from 
the  eye,  it  is  too  close  for  easy  viewing,  and  if  it  is  less  than 
one  three-hundredth  the  distance,  it  is  too  far  away.  A 


OPTICAL  SYSTEMS  AND  THE  EYE 


29 


ratio  of  diameter  of  object  to  distance  of  one  to  one-hundred 
is  most  suitable.  This  should  be  kept  in  mind  in  locating 
an  object  to  be  viewed  before  the  scanning-disc.  At  the 
receiving  end  seeing  will  be  easier  if  all  other  lights  in  the 
room  are  dimmed,  for  stray  light  will  cause  the  pupil  of  the 
eye  to  contract  needlessly  and  will  thus  close  off  much  of 
the  light  from  the  television  screen. 

Owing  to  the  fact  that  the  eye  does  not  change  at  once 
in  response  to  any  change  in  light  intensity,  but  has  a  lag 
of  about  one-tenth  of  a  second,  it  is  possible  to  produce  the 
sense  of  continuous  motion  by  placing  an  object  successively 
at  slightly  different  positions  and  allowing  it  to  be  viewed  at 
tenth-second  intervals.  This  is  made  use  of  in  the  produc- 


3 


FIG.  19. — The  sensation  produced  in  the  eye  is  not  in  proportion  to  the 
stimulation.  The  relation,  which  is  logarithmic,  is  shown  in  the  figure  above. 

tion  of  motion  pictures.  Without  this  so  called  persistence 
of  vision,  television  of  the  modern  type,  which  requires  that 
parts  of  the  image  be  sent  over  in  succession,  would  be 
impossible.  The  speed  of  scanning  is  determined  by  this  lag, 
which  dictates  that  pictures  must  be  scanned  completely  at 
least  ten  times  per  second  in  order  that  the  picture  may 
appear  as  continuous  to  an  observer. 

In  operating  a  television  receiver  it  should  also  be  re- 
membered that  the  sensation  received  by  the  eye  is  not  in 
direct  proportion  to  the  intensity  of  the  light,  but  to  a 
logarithmic  function  of  this  intensity.  Thus  1000  foot 
candles  does  not  produce  an  appreciably  greater  effect  than 
100  foot  candles.  This  will  be  seen  in  Fig.  19. 


30  TELEVISION 

In  operating  televison  apparatus  one  should  never  forget 
the  fact  that  every  precaution  should  be  made  to  protect 
the  eye.  If  one  is  projecting  the  light  from  a  neon  lamp 
onto  a  screen  at  the  receiving  end,  it  should  be  remembered 
that  increasing  the  screen  size  will  give  a  less  intense  image 
and  may  result  in  eye  strain.  At  the  sending  end  an  intense 
source  of  light  should  not  be  used  to  the  discomfort  or  pos- 
sible injury  of  the  subject.  By  doing  so  one  is  only  fooling 
oneself  into  the  belief  that  he  is  making  more  progress  than 
is  actually  the  case.  Bigger  screens,  better  scanning,  etc., 
will  only  come  with  improved  apparatus  and  eye  injury  will 
not  further  the  cause  but  will  weaken  it. 


CHAPTER  IV 
ELECTROMAGNETIC  WAVES 

MUCH  of  our  present  understanding  concerning  the  be- 
havior of  light  is  based  on  the  assumption  that  we  are  deal- 
ing with  a  wave  motion.  Just  how  close  this  hypothesis 
approaches  the  truth  remains  a  matter  of  conjecture.  Con- 
siderable evidence  obtains  to  discredit  such  a  viewpoint; 
yet  so  many  of  the  common  phenomena  associated  with  light 
can  be  readily  explained  on  the  basis  of  a  wave  theory,  that 
for  pedagogical  purposes,  at  least,  this  interpretation  will 
probably  remain  in  vogue  for  some  time  to  come,  At  any 
rate,  such  a  treatment  of  the  subject  will  prove  helpful  in 
so  far  as  it  concerns  us  in  our  study  of  television. 

Everyone  is  familiar  with  the  action  of  water  waves. 
How  often  have  we  seen  "the  angry  breakers  pile  upon  the 
barren  shore"?  Rather  we  should  have  said  "batter 
against,"  not  "pile  upon."  Although  there  is  no  doubt  of 
the  force  of  their  impact,  as  one  sometimes  finds  when  surf 
bathing;  yet  considering  an  extended  period  of  time,  no 
appreciable  volume  of  \vater  is  transferred  landward  despite 
the  fact  that  there  may  have  been  a  continual,  apparent 
movement  of  the  waves  in  that  direction.  Herein  lies  an 
important  characteristic  of  all  wave-motion, — energy  will 
be  carried  from  one  point  to  another  but  the  material  car- 
rier thereof  remains  in  situ. 

In  order  the  better  to  understand  the  mechanism  by 
means  of  which  this  is  accomplished,  let  us  turn  to  the 
example  of  a  wave  form  sent  along  a  rope.  Suppose  the 
rope  to  be  held  horizontally  and  a  very  small  section  marked 

31 


32  TELEVISION 

so  as  to  distinguish  it  from  the  rest.  Let  this  portion  be 
viewed  through  a  narrow  vertical  slit  of  considerable  length. 
If  now  an  undulation  be  sent  along  the  rope  by  moving  one 
end  up  and  down  rapidly,  the  mark  will  be  seen  to  travel 
up  and  down  the  viewing  slit.  Thus,  in  this  case,  the  parts 
of  the  vibrating  material  move  at  right  angles  to  the  direc- 
tion in  which  the  wave  form  travels;  i.e.,  in  which  the  energy 
is  transferred.  This  is  typical  of  the  class  known  as  trans- 
verse waves  —  the  category  to  which  light  radiations  belong. 
Some  of  the  more  important  terms  used  in  connection 
with  vibratory  phenomena  may  be  understood  by  reference 
to  Fig.  20.  A  is  the  amplitude  or  maximum  displace- 
ment of  a  particle  from  its  rest  position.  This  is  important 
as  a  measure  of  the  intensity  —  the  loudness  of  a  sound  or 
the  brightness  of  a  light.  A  (lambda),  the  distance  between 
consecutive  crests,  is  called  the  wave-length.  The  number 
of  complete  wave-lengths  sent  out  per  second  is  known  as 
the  frequency,  generally  designated  by  the  Greek  letter  v 
(nu).  Suppose  a  vibrating  source  sends  out  ten  complete 
undulations  every  second,  each  two  feet  long;  clearly  the 
fore  of  the  first  disturbance  —  the  wave  front  —  must  have 
reached  a  point  twenty  feet  from  the  source  in  one  second, 
if  there  is  to  be  no  overlapping  of  the  wave  forms.  The 
distance  traversed  by  the  energy  each  second  we  call  the 
velocity  (F)  of  the  disturbance.  From  the  simple  numerical 
case  considered,  we  are  led  to  an  important  generalization, 
fundamental  in  the  study  of  all  wave  phenomena.  The 
'velocity  is  equal  to  the  product  of  the  wave-length  by  the 
frequency  —  in  terms  of  the  symbols  defined  above: 


Another  important  attribute  of  most,  possibly  all  true, 
wave  disturbances  is  best  illustrated  by  a  common  example. 
Let  us  attend  a  band  concert  given  in  a  large  stadium.  If 
our  ears  are  good  enough,  we  shall  hear  the  same  tunes 


ELECTROMAGNETIC  WAVES 


33 


whether  we  sit  well  forward  or  near  the  rear.  Since  the 
various  notes  played  are  of  different  pitch  (that  is  fre- 
quency) and  loudness  (that  is  amplitude),  this  must  mean 
that  the  velocity  of  sound  is  independent  of  these  two 
factors;  else  the  time  of  the  music  would  be  effected.  One 
might  argue  that  sound  was  not  a  wave-motion;  or  if  so, 
traveled  with  an  infinite  velocity.  Both  contentions,  how- 
ever, are  easily  disproven.  Under  suitable  conditions,  sound 
disturbances  may  be  photographed  and  shown  to  behave 
much  like  water  waves.  As  to  the  velocity  of  their  propaga- 
tion, it  may  be  readily  measured  by  the  simple  expedient 


FIG.  20. — This  shows  a  typical  wave  form,  where  \  is  the  wave-length  and 

A,  the  amplitude. 

of  timing  the  interval  between  the  flash  and  the  report  of 
a  gun,  observed  from  a  known  distance.  More  extended 
experiments  show  us  that  the  nature  and  condition  of  the 
vibrating  medium  are  the  only  factors  of  influence  in  de- 
termining the  velocity  of  waves  of  any  given  type.  In  this 
last  conclusion  lies  the  keynote  to  one  of  the  most  interesting 
controversies  in  the  history  of  physics;  one  in  which  the 
last  word  has  not  yet  been  said.  What  are  light  radiations? 
Even  before  the  time  of  Newton,  the  idea  that  light 
was  an  undulatory  disturbance  had  found  some  favor.  That 
great  genius,  however,  inclined  toward  a  corpuscular  theory; 
pointing  out  the  observed  fact  that  "light  travels  in  straight 


34  TELEVISION 

lines,"  indeed  all  the  phenomena  of  geometric  optics,  could 
well  be  explained  by  assuming  the  rays  to  consist  in  ex- 
tremely small  particles  projected  from  the  source  of 
illumination.  Later,  improved  optical  instruments  and  more 
careful  observations  showed  definitely  that  there  were  in- 
stances where  light  did  not  follow  a  straight  path — cases 
where  it  actually  bent  around  corners  (diffraction).  Here 
was  strong  evidence  for  the  wave  theory  since  on  this  basis 
a  much  more  simple  explanation  could  be  given. 

Whether  wave  or  corpuscular,  the  disturbance  should 
have  some  finite  velocity;  yet  seemingly  it  travels  with  in- 
finite speed.  In  the  very  experiment  that  was  suggested  to 
determine  the  velocity  of  sound,  it  was  tacitly  assumed  that 
no  time  elapsed  between  the  flash  at  the  gun's  muzzle  and 
the  appearance  thereof  to  a  distant  observer.  The  truth  of 
the  matter  is  that  the  earth  is  too  small  a  laboratory  to 
detect  a  velocity  as  high  as  that  of  light;  unless  we  have 
at  our  command  a  very  accurate  means  for  measuring  ex- 
tremely small  intervals  of  time.  Lacking  such  a  device, 
early  investigators  were  unable  to  obtain  conclusive  results. 
From  the  vast  laboratory  of  the  heavens  came  the  first  evi- 
dence that  light  actually  did  travel  at  a  finite  rate  of  speed, 
the  work  of  the  Danish  astronomer,  Romer. 

At  this  point  comes  a  portion  of  the  work  of  particular 
interest  in  connection  with  our  problem.  While  the  experi- 
mental workers,  by  the  use  of  refined  methods  where  the 
light  traveled  over  terrestrial  distances,  were  still  endeavor- 
ing to  verify  and  improve  Romer's  determination,  Max- 
well suggested  a  way  to  obtain  the  result  without  making 
any  velocity  measurements  whatsoever.  The  determination 
of  one  electrical  quantity,  for  example,  the  capacity  of  a 
condenser,  in  two  systems  of  units  already  fixed  was  all  that 
was  necessary.  Back  of  the  suggestion  lay  the  masterful 
discussion  forming  the  basis  of  the  classical  theory  of  elec- 
tromagnetic waves. 


Em  missions -Spectra 


Solar 
Spectrum 


Nitrogen 
\Spectrum) 

Oxygen 
Hydrogen 
Barium 
Calcium 

Strontium 

Indium 

Thallium 

Rubidium 
Caesium 
Potassium 
Lithium 


FlG.  22. 


ELECTROMAGNETIC  WAVES  35 

The  general  picture  given  by  this  classical  theory,  as  it 
has  been  filled  in  to  date,  is  indeed  comprehensive.  Many 
types  of  phenomena,  seemingly  unrelated,  are  included, 
y-rays,  x-rays,  ultra-violet,  visible,  and  infra-red  radiations, 
and  radio  waves,  all  fill  the  requirements  for  electromagnetic 
disturbances  as  described  by  Maxwell — at  least  to  a  fair 
extent.  All  have  the  same  velocity — 3  x  io10  cms.  per 
second  (where  the  exponent  of  io  indicates  the  number  of 
ciphers  to  follow  the  3).  Recalling  the  relation  given 
above  (F  =  v\)  it  will  be  seen,  that  if  the  wave-length  be 
short,  the  frequency  is  high  and  vice  versa.  Figure  21 
shows  how  the  various  kinds  of  radiations  fit  into  the  com- 
pleted catalog.  Figure  22  shows  the  visible  portion  of 
this  spectrum,  as  it  is  called,  in  more  detail. 

-  I          I     I        I  I  I  *~ 

7-Rays  X-Rays  ?  Ultra-      Visible          Infra-Red  Radio  Waves 

Violet 

FIG.  21. — Schematic  chart  of  electromagnetic  disturbances. 

The  theory  is  by  no  means  free  from  criticism.  One 
of  the  most  obviously  questionable  features,  is  the  existence 
of  a  vibratory  medium  through  which  the  radiations  must 
pass.  In  our  initial  discussion  we  stressed  the  fact  that  in 
order  to  transfer  energy  from  one  point  to  another  by  a 
wave-motion,  a  material  capable  of  supporting  the  wave 
forms  must  intervene.  The  action  hinges  on  the  elastic 
properties  of  this  intermediary.  Great  quantities  of  radiant 
energy  come  to  us  from  the  sun;  yet  we  have  good  reason 
to  believe  that  most  of  the  distance  between  us  and  that 
body  is  extremely  close  to  a  perfect  vacuum.  Far  too  low 
a  concentration  of  ordinary  matter  exists  there  to  support 
a  wave  disturbance.  To  avoid  this  dilemma  it  is  necessary 
to  hypothecate  some  elastic  medium,  distinct  from  the  usual 
chemical  substances,  a  medium  which  must  be  conceived  to 


36  TELEVISION 

fill  all  interstellar  space.  The  name  applied  to  this,  so  far 
intangible  something,  is  uthe  ether." 

Other  discrepancies  between  theory  and  experiment  are 
most  pronounced  in  the  short  wave-length  end  of  the  gamut 
as  given  in  Fig.  21.  One  of  these  is  the  well-known  case 
of  dispersion — the  breaking  of  white  light  into  its  com- 
ponent colors  by  a  prism.  The  explanation  that  the  short 
wave-lengths  are  more  retarded  on  passing  through  the 
material  of  the  prism  than  are  the  long  ones,  runs  contrary 
to  the  idea  that  radiations  of  the  same  type  should  have  the 
same  velocity  in  a  given  medium  regardless  of  their  wave- 
length. The  deviation  being  greatest  for  the  short  wave- 
lengths or  high  frequencies,  it  is  for  these  that  the  classical 
theory  becomes  most  dubious.  What  the  correct  interpreta- 
tion of  the  variation  may  be  is  still  somewhat  hazy.  Un- 
questionably the  electron,  that  almost  infinitesimal  unit  of 
negative  electricity,  holds  the  answer.  As  yet,  however, 
there  is  still  much  to  be  learned  concerning  the  interrelation 
of  high  frequency  radiations  and  electrons. 

In  the  last  paragraph  mention  was  made  of  the  fact 
that  white  light  actually  consists  of  many  different  wave- 
lengths or  colors.  The  proportions  in  which  the  different 
components  are  mixed  depends  on  the  nature  of  the  source 
of  the  illumination.  Where  this  is  an  incandescent  solid, 
there  is  an  important  relation  between  its  temperature  and 
the  character  of  the  radiation  emitted.  For  qualitative  pur- 
poses, this  may  be  expressed  by  saying  that  the  light  becomes 
more  intense  (more  energy  is  given  off)  and  more  of  the 
short  wave-lengths  are  included  as  the  temperature  of  the 
emitter  increases.  See  Fig.  23. 

The  effect  may  be  easily  illustrated  by  connecting  a  small, 
3-4  volt  flash-light  bulb  across  a  6  volt  storage  battery, 
through  a  variable  resistance.  If  considerable  resistance 
be  left  in  the  circuit  the  filament  will  emit  no  light  whatso- 
ever. Nevertheless  the  outside  of  the  bulb  will  become 


ELECTROMAGNETIC  WAVES 


37 


warm  to  the  touch,  showing  that  at  this  stage  the  filament 
is  giving  off  only  low  frequency  radiations  invisible  to  the 
eye  but  sensible  as  heat  producers.  As  the  resistance  is 
gradually  cut  out  of  the  circuit,  the  filament  will  first  become 
dull  red,  then  bright  red,  then  yellow,  and  finally  white  in 


1450°  C 


1 


3          4 

Wave  Length 


6  x  1(T4  cms.. 


FIG.  23. — Relation  of  maximum  wave-length  in  emitted  spectrum  to  temper- 
ature of  emitter.   Note  displacement  toward  shorter  wave-lengths  with  increase 

of  temperature. 


color — giving  off  more  illumination  at  each  successive  stage. 
A  further  decrease  in  resistance  will  give  so  much  current 
through  the  filament  wire  as  to  cause  it  to  melt;  but  just 
before  this  happens,  the  light  will  become  uncomfortably 
bright  for  the  eyes  and  will  take  on  a  slightly  bluish  char- 


38  TELEVISION 

acter — i.e.,  shortwave-lengths  are  beginning  to  predominate. 
As  might  be  surmised  from  the  foregoing  experiment,  where 
higher  frequency  radiations  were  produced  when  larger 
amounts  of  energy  were  passed  through  the  wire  in  a  given 
time;  there  is  a  connection  between  the  energy  of  a  radiation 
and  its  frequency.  The  relation  is  that  the  energy  is  equal 
to  the  product  of  a  constant  (known  as  Planck's  constant) 
by  the  frequency.  This  product,  hv,  where  h  is  Planck's 
constant  and  v  the  frequency  of  a  disturbance,  is  called  a 
quantum, — a  bundle  of  energy.  So  it  appears  that  we  might 
consider  light  to  consist  of  little  packets  of  energy;  yet  to 
behave  like  a  wave  movement.  The  two  ideas  are  difficult 
to  correlate;  but  fortunately  in  most  cases  one  is  of  pre- 
dominate importance.  In  general  when  dealing  with  high 
frequency  disturbances  the  quantum  is  most  helpful;  whereas 
for  low  frequencies,  the  wave  serves  best. 


CHAPTER  V 
THE  SELENIUM  CELL 

NOT  infrequently  a  consideration  of  the  difficulties  aris- 
ing under  one  method  of  attack  upon  some  problem  proves 
helpful  in  understanding  the  development  of  another;  we 
are  much  more  apt  to  appreciate  the  new,  when  we  have 
seen  the  disadvantages  of  the  old.  For  this  reason  we  have 
included  in  this  book  a  brief  account  of  the  selenium  cell; 
even  though  practically  none  of  the  systems  now  in  use  for 
the  transmission  of  pictures  or  the  television  of  moving 
objects,  employ  this  device. 

Prior  to  1873  it  was  known  that  selenium,  after  anneal- 
ing in  the  neighborhood  of  200°  C.,  became  a  conductor  of 
electricity — albeit  an  extremely  poor  one.  The  first  intima- 
tion that  the  material  became  more  conductive  when 
illuminated  came  in  that  year  as  a  chance  observation  of  an 
attendant  in  the  Atlantic  Cable  station  at  Valencia,  Ireland, 
where  the  selenium  was  used  to  produce  high  resistances. 
The  importance  of  the  phenomenon  was  quickly  recognized. 
Following  close  upon  the  initial  observation,  we  find 
numerous  publications  verifying  the  fact  that  the  con- 
ductivity of  selenium  increases  on  exposure  to  light.  The 
names  of  Willoughby  Smith,1  Sale,  and  W.  Siemens  figure 
prominently  among  the  early  workers  in  this  field.  More 
recently  other  substances  have  been  found  to  behave  simi- 
larly, although  to  a  less  marked  extent:  tellurium,  thalium 

1  Journal  of  the  Society  of  Telegraph  Engineers,  2,  31. 

39 


40  TELEVISION 

sulphide,  stibnite  (antimony  sulphide),2  and  cuprous  oxide3 
may  be  mentioned.  For  further  information  the  follow- 
ing books  may  prove  helpful:  "Das  Selen"  by  Dr.  C.  Reis, 
"The  Moon  Element"  by  Fournier  d'Albe,  and  "Fernphoto- 
graphie"  by  Professor  Arthur  Korn. 

Workers  in  the  field  of  picture  transmission  quickly 
seized  upon  the  opportunity  presented  by  the  use  of  selenium 
to  change  light  impulses  into  variations  of  an  electric  current 
that  might  be  carried  over  wires  to  some  distant  recording 
device.  All  that  seemed  necessary  was  to  place  a  selenium 
resistance,  or  cell,  as  it  has  come  to  be  called,  in  series  with 
the  usual  telegraphic  circuit.  Light,  falling  on  the  cell, 
would  decrease  its  resistance :  when  the  illumination  was 
removed,  the  resistance  would  return  to  its  former  value. 
Thus  current  surges  should  pass  through  the  circuit  at  those 
times  during  which  the  selenium  cell  was  illuminated.  The 
method  looked  promising  and  attracted  much  attention. 
The  problem  of  telephotography — perhaps,  even  that  of 
television — seemed  well  on  the  road  to  solution.  Here  was 
a  substance  which  might  be  made  sensitive  to  illumination 
of  as  low  a  value  as  icr5  foot-candles,  about  the  lowest 
intensity  capable  of  affecting  the  human  eye.  Could  not  an 
artificial  eye — one  which  would  sense  the  light  and  shade 
of  an  object  as  does  the  human  organ — be  produced? 

The  problem  proved  much  more  baffling  in  practice  than 
it  appears  on  paper.  Sensitivity  to  variation  in  intensity  is 
not  the  only  requisite  for  a  light  sensory  mechanism  to  be 
used  for  picture  or  object  transmission.  It  must  also  be 
capable  of  reacting  rapidly  and  uniformly  to  successive 
changes.  In  the  last  requirement,  the  selenium  cell  was  soon 
found  to  be  seriously  at  fault. 

Since  the  term  selenium  cell  has  been  so  often  used,  it 
is  only  fair  to  describe  the  appearance  of  a  common  type 

2  Jaeger;  Kon.  Akad.  Amsterdam,   15,  724-30. 

3Pfund;  Physical  Review,  7   (second  series),  289  et  seq. 


THE  SELENIUM  CELL  41 

which  might  be  used  in  picture  transmission,  before  con- 
tinuing the  discussion  further.  The  following  brief  account 
applies  to  the  unit  made  by  Giltay,  of  Delft,  Holland;  but 
may  be  considered  as  characteristic  of  most  of  the  more 
recent  methods  of  manufacture. 

A  rectangular  piece  of  steatite  (a  high  grade  insulating 
material  which  is  practically  non-hygroscopic),  some  6x3 
cms.  in  size,  is  wound  with  two  platinum  spirals  spaced 
about  0.6  mm.  apart.  These  coils  form  the  two  terminals 
of  the  cell:  the  resistance  depends  on  the  selenium  which 
is  deposited  between  the  platinum  wires.  After  deposition 
in  the  plastic  form,  the  selenium  is  annealed  at  about  200° 
C,  at  which  temperature  a  transformation  to  grayish,  light- 
sensitive  crystals  occurs.  For  the  greatest  sensitivity  the 
deposit  should  be  extremely  thin;  hence  the  resistance  of  the 
cell  may  be  extremely  high,  as  much  as  250,000  ohms  or 
more.  Finally,  the  cell  should  be  thoroughly  dried  and 
vacuum  sealed. 

For  such  a  cell  the  change  in  resistance  is  approximately 
proportional  to  the  square-root  of  the  light  intensity  ab- 
sorbed per  unit  time.  For  the  average  commercial  type, 
the  effect  is  not  the  same  for  all  colors;  but  reaches  a 
maximum  for  a  wave-length  in  the  region  of  A,  =  7  x  io~5 
cms.  in  the  red.  This  difficulty  may  be  rectified  since  it  is 
possible  to  construct  cells  giving  a  maximum  even  in  the 
blue.  Hence  by  suitable  combinations  a  fairly  uniform  color 
sensitivity  may  be  obtained. 

A  much  more  serious  criticism  of  the  use  of  the  selenium 
cell,  especially  in  television,  lies  in  the  fact  that  it  does  not 
respond  instantaneously  to  a  change  in  the  intensity  of  the 
light  to  which  it  is  exposed.  Although  this  inertia  is  par- 
ticularly disastrous  in  work  with  moving  objects,  it  tends 
to  produce  distortion  even  in  picture  transmission.  Con- 
sider the  scheme  of  Professor  Korn,  described  in  Chapter 
II.  It  will  be  recalled  that  here  a  translucent  photographic 


TELEVISION 


film  is  placed  over  a  glass  cylinder  which  is  so  moved  that 
a  beam  of  light  will  pass  through  every  portion  of  the  film 
in  an  ordered  sequence,  thence  on  to  a  selenium  cell.  The 
object  being  to  produce  in  this  manner  fluctuations  in  a 
telegraph  or  telephone  circuit  which  in  turn  operate  a  device 
for  reproducing  the  original  on  photographic  paper.  If 
the  effect  of  the  inertia  and  lag  in  the  cell  were  simply  to 
delay  the  current  variation,  the  problem  might  be  solved  by 
suitable  retardation  of  the  receiving  mechanism. 


Exposure 


Light  cut  off 


Time 


FIG.  24. — Relation  of  conductivity  to  exposure  time  for  a  typical  selenium  cell. 

Consideration  of  Fig.  24,  however,  shows  that  the 
response  to  light  is  not  linear — the  greatest  part  of  the 
change  occurs  during  the  first  half  of  the  exposure  time. 
Furthermore,  when  the  light  is  cut  off,  the  conductivity  does 
not  return  immediately  to  its  former  value;  but  drops 
rapidly  at  first,  then  more  slowly,  never  quite  reaching  the 
initial  value  in  any  reasonable  length  of  time.  This  lag  in 
the  cell  results  in  increasing  values  of  the  "dark"  con- 
ductivity after  each  exposure  thus  producing  serious  distor- 
tion, as  may  be  noted  in  Fig.  25  reproduced  from  Chapter 
II  for  convenience.  Even  a  casual  inspection  of  the  diagram 
shows  that  the  current  plot  is  not  merely  a  reproduction  of 
the  light  intensity  curve  moved  to  the  right  on  the  time  axis; 
but  is  essentially  more  rounded,  failing  to  image  minor 
changes  in  light  variation  altogether.  We  would  expect  the 
reproduction,  therefore,  to  be  lacking  in  detail. 

As  previously  noted,  Professor  Korn  has  succeeded  in 


THE  SELENIUM  CELL 


43 


counteracting  to  a  fair  degree  both  the  inertia  and  lag  of 
the  selenium  cell  by  suitable  combination  of  pairs  of  cells 
arranged  so  that  the  bad  qualities  of  one  will  tend  to  neu- 
tralize those  of  the  other.  The  method  involves  simul- 
taneous illumination  of  two  cells  placed  in  opposite  sides 
of  a  Wheatstone  bridge,  so  that  the  current  flowing  in  the 
line  will  be  the  difference  between  that  in  the  two  cell  cir- 
cuits. With  correctly  chosen  cells  the  current  represented 


TIME. 


FIG.   25. — Comparison  of  the   fluctuation  of  light   intensity    (solid   line)    and 

conductivity  of   a   typical    selenium   cell    (dotted   line).     Note   time   lag   and 

rounding  of  conductivity  curve. 


by  this  difference  fluctuates  in  fair  synchronism  with  the  light 
variations.  For  a  further  discussion  of  the  system,  the  reader 
is  referred  to  Professor  Korn's  book  entitled  "Fernphoto- 
graphie"  or  to  ''Wireless  Pictures  and  Television"  by  T. 
Thorne  Baker  (pages  28-29). 

Other  workers  have  endeavored  to  devise  methods  by 
which  the  lag  of  the  selenium  cell  might  be  overcome.  One 
reported  by  T.  Thorne  Baker  in  "Nature,"  June  19,  1926, 
deserves  mention.  As  was  stated  above,  in  the  normal 
circuit  the  "dark"  conductivity  of  a  cell  tends  to  gradually 
increase  with  successive  exposures,  an  effect  which  Baker 
attributed  to  cumulative  ionization  of  the  material.  He, 
therefore,  subjected  the  cell  to  high  frequency  alternating 
current.  The  constant  reversal  of  direction  for  such  a  cur- 
rent makes  a  continued  migration  of  ions  impossible.  The 


44  TELEVISION 

frequency  of  the  current  used  was  much  more  rapid  than 
the  variation  in  light  intensities.  In  this  manner  Baker  re- 
ports that  he  was  able  to  correct  the  lag  of  the  cell — to 
quote :  uthe  lag  is  automatically  eliminated  at  each  alterna- 
tion of  the  current  with  the  result  that  the  cell  responds 
with  great  celerity  to  changes  in  illumination  and  returns  to 
zero  with  great  swiftness." 

A.  O.  Rankine  reported  in  "Nature,"  July  3,  1926,  on 
an  interesting  series  of  experiments  in  which  he  found  that 
the  light  conductance  could  be  increased  and  the  "dark" 
conductance  decreased  very  considerably  by  careful  desicca- 
tion of  the  cell  before  use.  For  this  reason  he  was  led  to 
attribute  the  bad  effects  of  "dark"  conductivity  to  a  minute 
film  of  moisture  between  the  electrodes,  i.e.,  in  parallel  with 
the  selenium.  It  will  be  noted  that  this  checks  the  ioniza- 
tion  theory,  since  the  migration  of  ions  would  naturally  take 
place  in  the  aqueous  skin  layer. 

R.  J.  Piersol  of  the  Research  Department  of  the  West- 
inghouse  Electric  and  Manufacturing  Company 4  contributes 
still  another  suggestion  for  improving  the  characteristics  of 
selenium  cells  to  be  used  for  the  measurement  of  light  inten- 
sities. His  work  indicated  that  best  results  were  obtained 
when  the  thickness  of  the  selenium  deposited  between  elec- 
trodes was  not  over  0.0014  cm-  The  conclusion  was  that 
this  represented  a  maximum  depth  of  light  penetration — or 
rather,  the  greatest  depth  effected  directly  by  variation  in 
the  incident  light.  Whereas  the  material  still  further  from 
the  surface  was  influenced,  the  effect  was  considered  to  be 
secondary,  transmitted  from  the  primary  surface  layer; 
hence  not  entirely  under  the  control  of  the  light  variation. 
It  should  be  mentioned  that  Piersol  also  recorded  the  fact 
that  absorbed  vapors  and  moisture  tended  to  increase 
"dark"  conductivity. 

Let  us  review  the  situation.     In  selenium  we  have  a 

4  Physical  Review,  30  (second  series)  664. 


THE  SELENIUM  CELL  45 

substance  capable  of  transforming  light  and  shadow  into 
what  might  be  called  an  electric  record.  With  suitable 
preparation  the  material  may  be  made  sensitive  to  fine 
gradations  in  light  intensity.  In  other  words,  it  may  be 
made  to  produce  an  appreciable  change  in  an  electric  circuit 
for  even  a  small  amount  of  incident  illumination.  Unfor- 
tunately, though,  the  electric  reaction  tends  to  lag  behind 
the  light  stimulus.  True,  this  difficulty  can  be  remedied  to 
a  great  extent  by  suitable  construction  of  the  cell.  Whereas 
the  results  may  be  satisfactory  for  the  relatively  slow  speeds 
used  in  picture  transmission;  television,  where  the  image 
must  be  scanned  completely  some  ten  to  sixteen  times  per 
second,  presents  a  very  much  more  troublesome  case.  Hence 
it  is  not  surprising  that  experimenters  should  begin  to  look 
elsewhere  for  a  solution  to  the  latter  problem. 

So  far  in  the  discussion  nothing  has  been  said  as  to  the 
cause  of  the  changes  observed  in  the  resistance  of  selenium 
when  exposed  to  light.  Although  the  question  is  somewhat 
beyond  the  scope  of  a  book  of  this  nature,  a  brief  statement 
of  the  principal  theories  that  have  been  advanced  may  not 
be  amiss.  One  of  the  early  suggestions  was  that,  under  the 
influence  of  light,  the  metal  changed  from  one  to  another 
allotropic  form  of  less  specific  resistance;  then  returned  to 
the  first  state  when  the  illumination  was  removed.5  Another 
theory,  and  this  appears  much  more  probable  in  the  light 
of  recent  research,  is  that  the  action  of  the  light  is  to  free 
electrons  from  their  bonds  within  the  selenium  atoms,  thus 
making  them  available  for  the  conduction  of  an  electric  cur- 
rent. In  this  case  the  removal  of  the  illumination  causes 
the  electrons  to  be  returned  to  their  former  "bound"  con- 
dition. The  last  concept  suggests  something  akin  to  the 
photoelectric  effect — "but  this,"  as  Kipling  would  say,  "is 
another  story,"  and  leads  us  to  the  topic  to  be  discussed  in 
the  next  chapter,  the  photoelectric  cell. 

5Berndt:  Physikalische  Zeitschrift,  5,  121-4. 


CHAPTER  VI 
THE  PHOTOELECTRIC  CELL 

WHEN  one  reviews  the  phenomenal  progress  that  has 
been  made  during  the  past  fifty  years  in  matters  technical, 
one  cannot  fail  to  recognize  the  importance  of  the  part 
played  by  the  great  genius  of  those  theorists  of  the  last 
century  who  set  the  course  which  has  proven  so  productive 
for  subsequent  investigators.  What  might  now  be  the  con- 
dition of  our  systems  of  communication,  both  by  wire  and 
by  radio,  had  the  keen  mind  of  Clerk  Maxwell  not  formu- 
lated the  classical  electro-magnetic  theory?  Certain  it  is 
that  Hertz  was  activated  by  the  desire  to  confirm  this  theory 
with  experiment  when  he  first  succeeded  in  producing  and 
detecting,  what  we  call  today,  radio  waves.  Nevertheless, 
his  laboratory  oscillator,  which  so  beautifully  verified  Max- 
well's generalizations  regarding  the  properties  of  electro- 
magnetic waves — be  they  radio,  heat,  or  light — also  led  to 
the  discovery  of  a  phenomenon  that  marks  one  of  the  prin- 
cipal weaknesses  in  the  classical  theory.  As  is  so  often  the 
case,  the  exception  has  attracted  as  much  attention  as  the 
rule. 

In  1887,  while  using  a  spark-gap  to  measure  the  energy 
of  the  electro-magnetic  waves  emitted  from  an  oscillating 
circuit  containing  a  similar  gap,  Hertz  noted  a  peculiar 
effect.1  His  method  was  to  adjust  the  two  circuits  to 
resonance,  then  measure  the  maximum  separation  of  the 
points  for  which  sparking  could  be  produced  in  the  receiver. 

1  See  "Electric  Waves"  by  Hertz. 

46 


THE  PHOTOELECTRIC  CELL  47 

Wishing  to  prevent  air  currents  and  hoping  thereby  to  ob- 
tain a  longer  spark,  he  experimented  with  a  cardboard 
chimney  placed  around  the  receiving  gap.  This,  however, 
produced  just  the  contrary  to  the  desired  effect,  requiring 
the  terminals  to  be  brought  closer  together  before  discharges 
would  take  place.  Surmising  that  this  might  be  due  to  the 
fact  that  the  light  from  the  sending  gap  was  screened  from 
the  receptor,  Hertz  used  glass  to  replace  the  opaque  ma- 
terial. The  result  remained  the  same.  Yet  when  quartz 
was  used  for  the  screen  no  diminution  of  the  sparking 
distance  occurred.  Since  quartz  will  transmit  ultra-violet 
light,  whereas  cardboard  and  glass  are  alike  opaque  thereto; 
Hertz  concluded  that  it  must  have  been  this  portion  of  the 
luminous  discharge  from  the  sending  gap  which  in  some 
manner  facilitated  the  production  of  a  spark  in  the  receiving 
circuit. 

It  was  soon  found  that  ultra-violet  radiation  from  any 
source  would  have  a  similar  effect.  Hallwachs,2  in  1888, 
made  some  progress  toward  a  further  explanation  of  the 
phenomenon.  He  allowed  the  radiation  from  an  iron  arc, 
rich  in  ultra-violet,  to  fall  on  a  negatively  charged  zinc  plate 
that  was  well  insulated  and  connected  to  an  electroscope. 
The  collapsing  of  the  electroscope  leaves  showed  that  under 
this  illumination  the  zinc  gradually  lost  its  charge.  Yet 
when  a  positively  charged  plate  was  treated  in  a  similar 
manner,  no  loss  in  charge  was  observed.  A  neutral  body 
showed  a  slight  tendency  to  become  positively  charged.  The 
suggestion  offered  was  that  under  the  influence  of  ultra- 
violet rays  a  metal  tends  to  lose  negative  charge.  The  next 
question  naturally  is,  "What  constitutes  negative  charge  and 
how  is  it  lost?" 

Elster  and  Geitel 3  found  that  those  metals  which  are 
highest  in  the  electro-motive  series — i.e.,  most  chemically 

2  Ann.  Physik,  33,  301. 

3  Ann.  Physik,  38,  40,  497. 


48  TELEVISION 

active — showed  the  effect  under  consideration  most  strongly. 
The  alkali  metals,  which  top  the  list,  were  acted  upon  by 
light  of  wave-length  even  in  the  visible  portions  of  the  spec- 
trum. They  also  pointed  out  that  the  action  took  place 
with  undiminished  strength  even  in  the  best  vacuum  obtain- 
able; hence  was  not  dependent  upon  the  presence  of  gas 
molecules. 

Lenard  4  demonstrated  clearly  that  ions  of  the  negatively 
charged  material  were  not  involved  in  the  charge  transfer, 
as  is  the  case  for  electrolysis.  He  sealed  two  electrodes, 
one  of  sodium-amalgam  and  the  other  of  platinum,  into  an 
evacuated  bulb.  The  circuit  was  then  closed  externally 
through  a  battery  so  as  to  keep  the  sodium  at  a  high  nega- 
tive potential.  When  the  amalgam  terminal,  the  cathode, 
was  illuminated  by  ultra-violet  light  a  current  flowed  in  the 
circuit.  The  action  was  allowed  to  continue  until,  had  the 
sodium  ions  been  the  current  carriers,  enough  of  them  would 
have  collected  on  the  platinum  anode  for  their  presence  to 
have  been  readily  detected  by  a  standard  chemical  test.  No 
such  test  was  given.  Ions  were  apparently  not  the  prime 
movers  in  this  phenomenon. 

It  is  to  the  classical  experiments  of  J.  J.  Thomson  per- 
formed in  the  Cavendish  Laboratories,  Cambridge,  Eng- 
land, that  we  must  turn  for  the  answer  to  our  question. 
Here  about  1897,  the  existence  of  the  electron,  the  smallest 
particle  of  negative  electricity,  was  first  proven.  The  ap- 
paratus used  in  this  work  is  so  closely  analogous  to  the 
cathode-ray  oscillograph  to  be  considered  in  a  later  chapter 
that  we  shall  leave  the  discussion  until  that  point.  For  the 
present,  suffice  it  to  say  that  we  are  now  in  a  position  to 
explain  the  loss  of  negative  charge  without  involving  either 
gas  molecules  or  metal  ions.  We  need  simply  say  that  under 
the  influence  of  light  waves,  preferably  of  the  ultra-violet 
type,  electrons  will  be  liberated  from  a  metallic  surface.  In 

4  Ann.  Physik,  2,  359   (1900). 


THE  PHOTOELECTRIC  CELL  49 

the  experiments  of  Hertz,  these  electrons  ionized  the  air 
gap,  thus  rendering  it  more  conductive,  easier  for  the  elec- 
tric energy  to  cross  in  the  form  of  a  spark.  Such  electrons, 
once  free,  are  all  alike  no  matter  with  what  atom  they  may 
have  been  previously  associated.  So  Lenard  could  detect 
none  of  the  attributes  of  sodium  on  his  anode  even  though 
the  carriers  had  actually  come  from  that  metal. 

Electrons  liberated  from  an  atom  under  the  influence  of 
light  are  aptly  called  "photo-electrons."  Just  what  may  be 
the  mechanism  of  their  release  need  not  concern  us;  so  long 
as  we  recognize  that  the  optimum  conditions  are  obtained 
by  using  a  cathode  made  of  one  of  the  most  chemically  active 
metals  and  by  using  radiation  of  short  wave-length  typical 
of  the  ultra-violet  end  of  the  spectrum. 

The  question  in  which  we  are  most  interested  is  uHow 
may  the  photoelectric  effect  best  be  utilized  to  solve  the 
problem  of  television ?"  It  will  be  apparent  from  the  pre- 
ceding discussion  that  we  now  have  another  method  for 
converting  light  changes  into  electric  currents.  What  ad- 
vantages or  disadvantages  does  it  possess  when  employed 
in  television? 

Stoletow,5  as  early  as  1890,  devised  what  might  be 
termed  the  first  photoelectric  cell — a  device  which  produced 
a  photoelectric  current  when  illuminated.  Referring  to 
Fig.  26,  which  illustrates  the  apparatus  used,  C  is  a  zinc 
plate  connected  to  the  negative  terminal  of  a  high  voltage 
battery,  B  (what  one  would  call  in  radio  terminology,  a 
B  battery)  ;  A  is  a  platinum  screen  connected  to  the  positive 
of  the  battery;  G  is  a  galvanometer  for  measuring  the  cur- 
rent in  the  circuit.  Under  normal  conditions  the  air  re- 
sistance between  C  and  A  is  so  high  that  no  current  will 
flow.  When  the  cell  is  illuminated  so  that  ultra-violet  radia- 
tion will  pass  through  the  screen  anode  on  to  the  zinc 
cathode,  the  latter  will  emit  photo-electrons.  These,  at- 

5  Jour,  phys.,  9,  486  (1890). 


50  TELEVISION 

tracted  by  the  high  positive  potential,  cross  the  air  gap  to 
the  anode.  From  that  point  the  chemical  action  of  the  bat- 
tery returns  them  to  the  cathode,  ready  to  recommence  the 
circuit.  This  circulation  of  electrons  constitutes  an  electric 
current,  although  in  accordance  with  an  old  convention  we 
designate  the  direction  of  the  current 
as  the  reverse  of  that  of  electron  flow. 
Since  the  electrons  have  almost  neg- 
ligible mass,  only  one  two-thousandth 
^_^  that  of  the  hydrogen  atom,  the  action 

C- — (  o  j-^   of  the  anode  field  will  give  them  an 
I   extremely    high     acceleration.       Once 
.  .       J   freed  from  the  cathode  by  the  action 

i  r"V*  **!""  Of  light,  they  will  bridge  the  gap  to 
FIG.  26.  —  Apparatus  as  the  positive  terminal  with  velocities 

used  by  Stoletow  in  study-  ,  .  ,  r    ,.    ,        .       ,  c        r 

ing  photo-emission.  approaching  that  of  light  itself.  In- 
deed, the  entire  action  is  as  nearly 

instantaneous  as  we  could  wish.  Here  is  a  distinct  ad- 
vantage over  the  use  of  selenium  cells,  or  any  of  the  other 
systems  requiring  the  movement  of  a  stylus  having  mass. 

Though  the  photoelectric  cell,  so  described,  may  pos- 
sess this  one  very  desirable  quality — speed  of  reaction; 
nevertheless,  it  has  several  very  troublesome  features.  In 
the  first  place,  the  size  of  the  current  which  is  produced  in 
such  a  cell,  even  by  the  intense  illumination  of  a  carbon  arc, 
wrill  be  very  small  unless  ionization  occurs  in  the  gas  between 
the  electrodes.  Secondly,  when  such  ionization  does  take 
place,  the  characteristics  of  the  cell  become  uncertain — its 
response  no  longer  being  proportional  to  the  intensity  of  the 
incident  illumination.  Thirdly,  if  the  cathode  be  zinc,  as 
above,  ultra-violet  radiation  will  be  necessary  for  the 
reaction. 

The  work  of  Elster  and  Geitel,  mentioned  above,  sug- 
gests a  possible  remedy  for  the  last  two  difficulties.  If  the 
electrodes  be  sealed  in  a  highly  evacuated  bulb,  the  troubles 


THE  PHOTOELECTRIC  CELL 


arising  from  gaseous  ionization  can  be  eliminated.  (The 
discussion  to  be  found  in  Chapter  VII  on  the  action  of  dis- 
charge tubes  will  make  this  point  more  clear.)  Again,  if 
we  replace  the  zinc  by  one  of  the  alkali  metals — sodium, 
potassium,  rubidium,  caesium — ordinary  white  light  will 
suffice  to  free  photo-electrons  from  the  cathode.  This  last 
is  a  most  distinct  improvement  since  any  intense  source  of 
illumination  may  now  be  used  and  the  cell  may  be  made  of 
glass. 

There  still  remains,  however,  the  problem  of  increasing 
the  current  output.  Suitable  preparation  of  the  cathode 
was  found  to  help  somewhat.  Elster  and 
Geitel  produced  a  hydride  of  potassium 
by  bombarding  the  metal  with  electrons, 
in  an  atmosphere  of  hydrogen.  They  also 
deposited  the  metal  in  a  colloidal  form. 
Both  schemes  gave  increased  sensitivity, 
the  last  mentioned  being  the  better,  albeit 
the  more  difficult  method.  The  General 
Electric  Company  followed  the  practice  of 
silvering  the  inner  surface  of  the  bulb, 
later  heating  a  circular  portion  so  as  to 
drive  off  the  silver;  thus  leaving  an  open- 
ing to  admit  illumination.  Over  the  re- 
maining silvered  part,  there  was  then 
deposited  an  extremely  thin  layer  of  dis-  photoelectric  cell. 

•  11    j         j-  .  ,  .  ,.  T        Note  anode,  circle  of 

tilled  sodium,  potassium  or  rubidium.  In 
this  type,  the  anode  is  a  tungsten  wire 
usually  to  be  found  in  the  form  of  a 
loop  at  the  center  of  the  bulb.  (See 
Fig.  27.) 

These  vacuum  cells  are  extremely  reliable  in  their  action. 
One  type,6  now  on  the  market,  is  claimed  to  be  so  free  from 
the  fatigue  characteristic  of  the  selenium  cell  that  "it  will 
G  Bulletin  No.  271,  Dr,  R,  C,  Burr,  Pasadena,  California, 


( Courtesy     of     Ray- 
theon Mfg.  Co.] 

FIG.    27. — A    typical 


wire  at  center  of 
bulb,  and  standard 
vacuum-tube  base, 
only  two  of  whose 
contacts  are  used  in 
the  usual  circuit. 


TELEVISION 


record  direct  sunlight  (10,000  foot-candles)  all  day  and 
immediately  afterward  accurately  measure  the  light  from 
a  flashlight  bulb  at  one  meter."  For  a  given  applied  voltage 
the  output  is  directly  proportional  to  the  intensity  of  the 
incident  light,  as  may  be  seen  by  reference  to  Fig.  28. 
Such  properties  make  this  form  of  cell  very  useful  in  photo- 
metric work.  Yet  when  we  consider  that  a  60  c.p.  lamp 
only  6  inches  distant  gives  a  current  of  something  like 


INTENSITY 

FIG.  28. — Relation  between  the  intensity  of  incident  illumination  and  the  out- 
put of  a  typical  photoelectric  cell:  a  is  for  a  higher  applied  voltage  than  b. 

i/i 0,000  of  a  milliampere,  it  is  obvious  that  a  great  deal 
of  amplification  is  necessary  before  a  picture  transmission 
or  a  televison  circuit  can  be  operated. 

Not  until  the  perfection  of  the  three  electrode  vacuum 
tube  was  even  a  partially  satisfactory  solution  of  the  dif- 
ficulty found.  This  device,  so  well  known  for  its  service 
in  the  radio  set,  provides  a  most  excellent  means  for  am- 


THE  PHOTOELECTRIC  CELL 


53 


plifying  the  small  output  of  the  photo-cell.  Figure  29  illus- 
trates a  typical  circuit  used  for  this  purpose.  At  this  point,  it 
should  be  remarked  that  the  screened  grid  vacuum  tube  is 
extremely  well  adapted  to  this  service. 

Unfortunately,  there  are  limits  to  the  amount  of  amplifi- 
cation that  it  is  advisable  to  produce  in  vacuum  tube  circuits. 
The  restraining  factor  is  the  trouble  introduced  by  the  am- 
plification of  extraneous  circuit  noises.  In  picture  transmis- 
sion these  evince  themselves  as  spots;  in  television,  as 
irregular,  wavy  lines  across 
the  image  as  viewed 
through  the  scanning-disc 
or  on  the  screen.  Recent 
work  of  J.  B.  Johnson  of 
the  Bell  Telephone  Labora- 
tories, New  York  City,7 
seems  to  show  that  the 
origin  of  a  large  propor- 
tion of  such  noises  is  not 
in  the  vacuum  tube  itself, 
as  was  originally  thought, 
but  rather  in  the  flow  of  elec- 
trons through  the  resistances 
of  the  circuit.  A  photo- 
cell designed  by  Zwory- 
kin  of  the  Westinghouse  Electric  and  Manufacturing  Com- 
pany, tends  to  reduce  this  effect  to  a  minimum  by  the  com- 
bination of  the  photoelectric  cell  and  a  three  or  four 
element  vacuum  tube  within  the  same  bulb.  Of  course 
in  this  instance  care  must  be  exercised  to  screen  the 
photo-active  surface  from  the  light  given  by  the  vacuum 
tube  filament.  The  method  employed,  is  to  use  the  oxide 
type  of  filament  which  need  only  glow  dull  red  and  to  locate 
the  vacuum  tube  in  the  stem,  separated  by  a  light-tight 

7  Physical  Review,  32,  No.  i,  p.  97. 


FIG.  29. — Use  of  a  vacuum-tube  ampli- 
fier in  connection  with  a  photoelectric 
cell. 


54  TELEVISION 

diaphragm  from  the  photoelectric  cell  in  the  bulb.  There 
still  remains  the  difficulty  in  preventing  the  heating  of  the 
unit  by  radiation  from  the  vacuum  tube  filament. 

When  applied  to  television,  the  combination  of  vacuum 
tube  amplification  with  the  high  vacuum  type  of  photo- 
electric cell  still  leaves  much  to  be  desired.  In  picture  trans- 
mission, the  conditions  are  not  quite  so  exacting;  for  we 
may  use  a  very  intense  source  of  light  focused  on  a  small 
portion  of  a  specially  prepared  photographic  film  which 
covers  the  photoelectric  cell.  In  television,  on  the  other 
hand,  we  must  deal  with  light  reflected  from  the  object  to 
be  transmitted.  The  magnitude  of  the  problem  involved 
here  may  be  gleaned  from  the  fact  that  the  human  face, 
even  in  the  lightest  portions,  reflects  only  about  i/iooo  of 
the  light  incident  upon  it;  nor  can  a  source  of  high  intensity 
be  used  because  of  the  discomfort  occasioned  the  subject. 

Oddly  enough,  what  appears  at  present  to  be  a  solution 
lies  in  just  the  action  that  early  workers  found  vitiated 
their  photoelectric  cells — gaseous  ionization.  Careful  in- 
vestigation has  shown  that  the  fatigue  observed  in  gas-filled 
cells  is  not  a  necessary  concomitant  of  ionization.  Rather 
it  appears  that  contamination  of  the  photo-active  surface 
is  responsible.  If,  then,  an  inert  gas,  such  as  argon  or 
helium,  be  carefully  purified  before  admission  to  the  cell, 
we  should  be  able  to  obtain  the  increased  output  occasioned 
by  the  fact  that  the  gas  ions  give  us  an  increased  number 
of  current  carriers;  without  incurring  the  irregularities  of 
the  poorly  evacuated  tube.  This  is  just  what  is  done  in 
practice.  The  purification  of  the  gas  to  be  used  must  be 
performed  with  extreme  care,  as  even  the  slightest  trace 
of  impurity  tends  to  devitalize  the  photo-active  material. 

The  action  of  gaseous  ionization  may  be  employed  in 
a  second  tube  rather  than  in  the  photo-cell  itself.  In  this 
case,  the  photoelectric  action  may  be  regarded  merely  as  a 
trigger  which,  through  the  gas-filled  relay  tube,  releases 


THE  PHOTOELECTRIC  CELL 


55 


large  energy  pulses.  An  example  of  this  may  be  found  in 
the  Knowles'  Relay.8 

Another  feature  of  the  potassium  hydride  photoelectric 
cell,  which  causes  some  trouble  in  television,  is  that  its  sen- 
sitivity is  by  no  means  the  same  for  all  colors.  Reference 
to  the  curve  given  in  Fig.  30  shows  clearly  that  the  re- 
sponse to  red  light  will  be  only  about  %  of  that  to  violet, 
for  the  same  intensity.  The  usual  photographic  film  pos- 
sesses very  nearly  the  same  property;  possibly  for  some- 
what the  same  fundamental  physical  reason.  In  any  case, 
we  may  visualize  the  defects  in  the  televised  image  by  con- 
sideration of  the  familiar  snapshot. 

Whereas   a   red   object  and  blue   object  may  seem  of 


58ooA 


WAVE  LENGTH 


FIG.  30.  —  Sensitivity  curve  for  a  typical  potassium  hydride  photo-sensitive 
surface.     Maximum  occurs  in  the  upper  ultra-violet  region,  about 


equal  brightness  when  viewed  directly,  when  photographed 
on  the  usual  film  or  plate,  developed  and  printed,  it  is  quite 
possible  that  the  blue  one  will  appear  much  the  brighter  of 
the  two.  It  should  be  recalled  that  the  color  of  objects, 
when  illuminated  by  white  light,  depends  on  the  wave-length 
of  the  light  reflected.  Or  rather,  a  material  will  absorb 
certain  wave-lengths  and  reflect  others  —  the  net  result  or 
color  sum  of  those  reflected  is  what  we  call  the  color  of 
the  object.  Hence  a  red  substance  does  not  necessarily 

s  See  Chapter  XVI. 


56  TELEVISION 

reflect  only  red,  but  the  probabilities  are  that  long  wave- 
lengths, typical  of  the  red  end  of  the  spectrum,  predominate 
in  the  reflected  radiation.  Such  an  object  will  have  but  little 
effect  on  a  photoelectric  cell;  just  as  it  has  little  effect  on 
the  average  light  sensitized  plate.  In  other  words,  red 
subjects — or  red  parts  of  a  subject — when  televised  will 
appear  dull  on  the  reception  screen,  even  though  bright  in 
the  original.  If  the  neon  lamp  be  used  in  reception,  giving 


JU 

\ 

ux- 

86^ 

COCOA 

5£/V 

5/771 

'irr 

C/7 

AP/ 

CTE 

QfS'i 

7C 

cc 

NSTA 

NJ  i 

NED 

3Y' 

^u 

I 

r 

\ 

1 

\ 

\ 

§ 

I 

\ 

K 

1 

\ 

+  — 

^—  —  — 

—  *, 

^ 

k 
^ 

\ 

\ 

x 

X 

Tu 

« 

/ 

\ 

\ 

> 

/ 

/ 

\ 

/ 

S 

/ 

^ 

^ 

x 

/ 

' 

\ 

*•——  ^— 

^^^^ 

£ 

JPJ- 

-  tf/OLt 

T 

—  . 

<-j/y 

OL& 

-/?/ 

NGt. 

OF 

WS/i 

?Z£ 

WAVL 

LEA 

GTH. 

'-A 

~D^ 

^/Nf- 

M-A 

ED 

iOO      3000                     4000                     5000                     6000                     7000                 8000 

WAVELENGTH    IN      ANGSTPOMS 

(Courtesy  of  the  General  Electric  Co.} 
FIG.  31. — Sensitivity  of  caesium  type  photo-cell. 

a  red  glow  to  the  entire  image,  this  effect  becomes  even 
more  unnatural. 

Judging  from  the  evidence  on  hand,  this  difficulty  is 
now  well  on  the  road  to  solution.  The  research  laboratories 
of  the  General  Electric  and  of  the  Westinghouse  Electric 
companies  have  succeeded  in  producing  a  cell  which  gives 


THE  PHOTOELECTRIC  CELL 


57 


very  much  better  sensitivity  in  the  red  than  any  previous 
type.  Indeed,  it  will  be  noted  from  Fig.  31  that  there 
is  a  distinct  peak  in  the  region  of  7500  A.  The  effect 
is  produced  by  a  specially  treated  caesium  surface.  Quite 


PHOTO-ELECTRIC 


0 


CELL 


-III 


FIG.  32fl. — The  essentials  of  a  photoelectric  cell  circuit. 

likely  subsequent  research  will  develop  other  photo-active 
coatings  having  different  color  characteristics,  so  that  by 
suitable  blending,  a  response  to  all  colors  may  be  obtained 
which  is  comparable  to  that  of  the  human  eye. 


PHOTO-ELECTRIC 
CELL 


AMPLIFIER 

AttPLIFIER 

' 

(Courtesy  of  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories.) 

FIG.  32&. — Extension  of  the  circuit  of  320,  to  illustrate  function  of  photo-cell 
in  a  wire  television  system. 

Before  closing  a  chapter  on  the  photoelectric  cell,  some 
mention  should  be  made  of  the  wide  variety  of  uses  to 
which  it  may  be  put,  other  than  in  the  field  of  television  or 
picture  transmission.  As  was  stated  above,  the  vacuum 
type  of  cell  is  most  satisfactory  for  work  in  which  high  pre- 


58  TELEVISION 

cision  is  required.  This  type  may  be  used  for  photometry; 
or  with  a  relay,  for  the  operation  of  various  alarm  systems 
for  protection  against  both  fire  and  theft,  the  sorting  of 
materials  according  to  color,  the  inspection  of  metals  for 
rust  spots  or  flaws,  the  control  of  artificial  illumination,  etc. 


PHOTO-ELECTRIC 


(Courtesy  of  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories.} 

FIG.  32  c. — Extension  of  circuit  of  32  a,  to  illustrate  function  of  photo-cell  in 
a  radio  television  system. 

One  even  wonders  whether  it  has  not  been  credited  writh 
superhuman  intelligence  when  one  finds  that  Dr.  Phillip 
Thomas  of  the  Westinghouse  Co.  has  devised  a  method 
of  traffic  control  for  outlying  districts,  the  brains  of  which 
is  a  photoelectric  cell! 


CHAPTER  VII 
GLOW  LAMPS 

IN  previous  chapters,  we  have  already  learned  the 
fundamentals  of  television.  At  the  sending  end  it  is  neces- 
sary to  convert  varying  light  intensities  into  corresponding 
electrical  variations;  then  to  change  the  latter  biick  to  vary- 
ing light  intensities  at  the  receiving  end.  We  must,  then, 
have  some  device  which  reverses  the  action  of  the  selenium 
or  photoelectric  cell.  Electro-magnetic  valves  are  perhaps 
the  easiest  to  understand;  but  where  the  problem  is  one  of 
transmitting  an  animated  object  the  inertia  of  the  moving 
parts  of  any  such  device  make  it  impractical. 

It  is  well  known  that  the  brightness  of  any  electric  lamp 
depends  upon  the  current  through  the  filament.  Yet  in  the 
case  of  an  incandescent  lamp  the  heat  is  so  great  that  as 
much  as  a  tenth  of  a  second  may  elapse  before  a  decrease 
in  current  produces  a  corresponding  drop  in  brightness. 
Where  changes  in  light  intensity  may  reach  as  many  as 
20,000  variations  a  second,  the  absurdity  of  attempting  to 
develop  a  source  of  this  type  is  obvious. 

Fortunately  there  has  been  developed  a  lamp,  known 
as  the  glow  lamp,  which  is  able  to  follow  variations  in  cur- 
rent as  rapidly  as  100,000  cycles  or  changes  per  second. 
This  is  all  that  could  be  desired.  One  of  the  best  known 
of  these  is  the  neon  lamp  developed  by  D.  MacFarlan 
Moore.  Another  the  Aeo  light,  using  helium,  was  developed 
at  the  Case  Research  Laboratory.  The  last  mentioned 
is  used  extensively  in  photographing  talking  movies.  Lights 
using  the  glow  from  neon  and  from  mercury  vapor  are  now 

59 


60  TELEVISION 

common  in  advertising  signs.  They  are  the  tubular  signs 
which  glow  amber-red  for  neon  and  blue-violet  for  mercury. 
Not  infrequently  mixtures  of  inert  gases  with  mercury  are 
used  to  produce  other  colors. 

To  understand  the  action  of  these  lights  it  is  necessary 
to  know  something  of  the  fundamental  nature  of  both 
matter  and  electricity.  These  two  are  essentially  one  and 
the  same  thing  for  it  has  now  been  established,  beyond  a 
possibility  of  a  doubt,  that  all  matter  is  formed  of  two 
kinds  of  building  blocks — positive  and  negative  electricity. 
The  ninety-two  chemical  elements  differ  only  in  the  number 
and  arrangements  of  these  blocks.  From  these  ninety-two 
all  compounds  may  be  formed  by  using  the  elements  in  dif- 
ferent combinations.  The  number  is  almost  without  limit. 
It  is  also  established  that,  for  each  element,  there  is  a  cen- 
tral positive  nucleus  which  consists  for  the  most  part  of 
positive  electricity  held  together  by  a  few  negative  particles 
or  electrons,  as  they  are  called.  Outside  this  nucleus,  re- 
volving around  it  much  like  the  earth  revolves  around  the 
sun,  are  additional  electrons  to  make  up  a  total  equal  to 
the  number  of  positive  particles  or  protons  in  the  nucleus. 
At  the  present  time  there  is  a  discussion  as  to  the  exact 
nature  of  the  electrons,  whether  they  may  be  regarded  as 
solid  particles  or  as  waves  of  some  sort.  The  outcome  of 
this,  however,  will  make  no  appreciable  difference  in  the 
picture  here  presented. 

An  atom  is  only  in  a  stable  condition  when  the  totrl 
number  of  electrons  in  it  is  equal  to  the  total  number  of 
positive  particles.  If  for  any  reason  a  negative  particle  is 
knocked  out  of  the  atom,  another  will  sooner  or  later  be 
acquired.  That  is,  if  through  some  accident  an  electron  is 
torn  away,  the  atom  becomes  at  once  on  the  lookout  for  a 
replacement.  The  desired  electron  on  entering  the  atom 
and  falling  toward  the  nucleus  loses  energy.  Since  it  can 
only  fall  in  steps,  like  a  marble  rolling  down  a  flight  of 


GLOW  LAMPS  61 

stairs,  the  energy  will  be  given  out  in  pieces.  The  size  of 
these  will  depend  upon  the  distance  apart  of  the  possible 
orbits  in  which  the  electron  may  pause;  just  as  the  kinetic 
energy  lost  by  the  marble,  if  it  stops  on  a  given  step,  depends 
upon  how  great  was  the  drop  from  its  last  resting  place. 
The  energy  which  the  electron  gives  out  is  detected  by  us 
as  light  whose  color  is  related  to  the  size  of  jump  from  one 
orbit  to  another.  The  drops  in  the  case  of  the  electron,  as 
for  the  marble,  may  be  several  steps  at  a  time. 

If  electrons  are  in  some  manner  set  free  from  the  atoms 
and  are  made  to  flow  through  a  wire,  an  electric  current 
is  produced.  Due  to  definitions  introduced  into  the  study 
before  the  exact  nature  of  electricity  was  known,  the  current 
is  said  to  flow  in  a  direction  which  is  the  reverse  of  that 
taken  by  the  electrons.  The  current  is  said  to  flow  from 
plus  to  minus,  whereas  the  electrons  flow  in  the  opposite 
direction.  As  the  positive  particles  are  nearly  two-thousand 
times  as  heavy  as  the  electrons,  they  are  sluggish  and  hardly 
move  at  all  in  comparison.  This  fact  that  electrons  flow 
in  a  direction  opposite  to  the  current,  frequently  leads  to 
confusion. 

Now  we  know  that,  whereas  electricity  will  flow  through 
a  conducting  wire  under  a  few  volts,  it  requires  about 
28,000  volts  to  the  inch  to  make  it  flow  through  air.  When 
it  does  so,  the  form  taken  is  a  spark  resembling  a  lightning 
flash  on  a  small  scale.  When  such  a  spark  is  produced 
between  the  ends  of  two  wires  or  electrodes,  it  is  because 
electrons  from  one  of  them  have  been  projected  by  the  high 
voltage  with  sufficient  velocity  to  break  up  atoms  of  air 
which  they  strike.  The  flash  is  due  to  the  light  given  off 
on  recombination  of  electrons  with  atoms. 

If  the  wires  are  sealed  into  the  ends  of  a  tube  as  two 
electrodes  and  the  air  pressure  reduced,  the  spark  will  pass 
with  much  greater  ease.  In  this  case  the  electrons  sent  out 
go  much  farther  before  striking  an  atom  and  so  acquire 


62 


TELEVISION 


enough  velocity  to  break  it  up  even  when  the  voltage  is 
greatly  reduced  below  the  28,000  volts  to  the  inch  value. 
If  we  continue  to  reduce  the  pressure  the  spark  becomes 
quiet  and  fattens  out,  soon  to  fill  the  entire  tube  with  a 
glow  known  as  the  positive  column.  At  this  stage  the 
original  electrons  disrupt  atoms'  and  the  plus  and  minus 
parts  of  these,  joining  the  stream,  in  turn  break  up  other 
atoms.  And  so  the  action  goes  on.  A  condition  of  ioniza- 
tion  exists,  where  ions  are  everywhere  in  the  tube. 

The  positive  column  eventually  becomes  separated  from 
the  negative  electrode  by  a  dark  space,  the  electrode  itself 
becomes  covered  with  a  luminous  glow  which  extends  over 
its  surface  and  is  called  the  negative  glow.  From  this  we 
go  on  to  the  striated  condition  and  eventually  to  the  x-rays, 


(5 
f:i: 

;.       1 

i: 

. 

**9                             * 

»: 

-A 

rii' 

F 

.           .:! 

:  '        ,1 

i 

i! 

;',:i 

^     ,1 

1 

[| 

1 

'J> 

FIG.  33. — When  a  certain  stage  of  rarefaction  is  reached  in  a  discharge  tube 
the  glow  breaks  up  into  striations. 

but  we  need  not  consider  these  conditions  for  the  present 
problem.  The  glow  in  various  parts  of  a  partially  evacuated 
tube  is  shown  in  Fig.  33. 

The  neon  glow  lamp  represents  just  such  a  phenomenon 
as  has  been  described  above.  It  consists  of  two  electrodes 
in  a  tube  of  rarefied  neon,  evacuated  to  such  a  point  that 
the  negative  or  cathode  glow  is  present.  The  brightness 
of  this  glow  is  very  sensitive  to  current  changes,  a  fact  very 
useful  in  television.  As  the  current  varies  the  number  of 
ions  produced  changes;  the  number  of  electrons  falling  back 
into  atoms  changes,  hence  there  is  a  change  in  the  amount 
of  light  produced.  The  entire  effect  takes  place  so  rapidly, 
as  has  been  said,  that  variations  as  rapid  as  100,000  per 


GLOW  LAMPS 


second  can  be  followed.     In  fact  even  this  may  not  be  the 
upper  limit. 

Just  why  neon  is  used  instead  of  some  other  gas  may 
be  a  question.  The  answer  is  given  in  the  brightness  which 
can  be  produced  by  very  feeble  currents  in  that  gas.  The 
next  best  is  mercury  vapor,  but  this  is  not  practicable  since 


(  Courtesy  of  Raytheon  Mfg.  Co.  ) 
FIG.      «. 


(  Courtesy  Case  Research  Laboratory,  Inc.  ) 
FIG.    4#. 


FIG.  34«.  —  The  Raytheon  Kino  lamp  uses  neon  as  the  rare  gas.    It  is  intended 
primarily  for  amateur  use. 

FIG.  34&.  —  The  Aeo  light  is  used  largely  in  making  talking  motion  pictures. 
The  gas  used  is  helium. 

heating  is  required.  Advertising  signs  are  frequently  made 
with  neon  and  mercury.  The  neon  starts  the  sign  and  the 
heat  from  the  resulting  current  is  sufficient,  in  fair  weather, 
to  vaporize  the  mercury.  In  cold  or  windy  weather  such 
signs  are  frequently  streaked  with  the  pink  glow  of  neon. 


64  TELEVISION 

Neon  has  another  considerable  advantage  aside  from 
the  brightness  obtainable.  Being  one  of  the  inert  groups 
it  does  not  readily  combine  with  any  materials  or  impurities 
of  the  electrodes.  Furthermore,  neon  is  not  subject  to  as 
great  absorption  by  the  glass  and  other  parts  of  the  tube 
as  are  other  gases.  Neither  is  it  occluded  to  any  extent; 
later  to  be  evaporated  into  the  tube.  As  such  tubes  are 
very  sensitive  to  pressure  variations  all  this  is  of  the  utmost 
importance. 

Types  of  neon  tubes  are  shown  in  Fig.  34.  Some  are 
so  arranged  that  the  negative  electrode  is  in  the  middle, 
for  the  purpose  of  concentrating  the  light  for  easy  focusing 
by  a  lens  system.  Small  lamps  of  this  type  use  only  about 
l/io  watts.  For  this  reason  they  are  coming  into  use  as  pilot 
lights  to  warn  the  user  when  the  power  is  on  in  any  elec- 
trical device.  A  single  one  of  these  lamps  uses  so  little 
power  that  it  will  not  turn  the  usual  electrical  meter. 

Where  a  large  viewing  screen  is  to  be  shown  to  an  entire 
audience  thousands  of  these  little  lamps  would  be  required. 
To  avoid  this  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories  have  devised 
a  multiple  lamp  of  the  same  sort.  This  consists  of  a  long 
tubing  through  the  center  of  which  runs  a  spiral  wire.  The 
wire  constitutes  one  electrode  and  rectangles  of  foil  pasted 
on  the  outside  of  the  tube  at  regular  intervals  act  as  the 
other  electrodes.  The  action  takes  place  through  the  glass. 
As  contact  is  made  with  a  given  piece  of  foil  the  tube  lights 
up  at  that  point.  Thus  we  have  the  equivalent  of  a  great 
number  of  lamps;  when,  in  reality,  it  is  but  a  single  tube. 
The  tube  is  bent  back  on  itself  a  number  of  times  so  as  to 
form  a  rectangular  screen,  as  will  be  noted  in  Fig.  35. 
Its  use  will  be  better  understood  when  the  chapter  on  the 
Bell  Telephone  system  of  television  is  read. 

In  the  Case  Aeo  light  used  chiefly  in  making  talking 
pictures  and  shown  in  Fig.  34^,  the  gas  is  helium.  The 
tube  is  of  glass,  or  sometimes  quartz  to  allow  the  emission 


GLOW  LAMPS  65 

of  the  ultra-violet  rays,  for  their  actinic  effect  is  large.  It 
is  a  little  over  an  inch  wide  and  about  six  inches  long.  The 
anode,  or  positive  electrode,  is  nickel  and  the  cathode,  or 
negative  electrode,  platinum  coated  with  a  mixture  of 


(Courtesy  of  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories.} 


FIG.  35. — The  neon  lamp  shown  above  is  the  equivalent  of  many  of  the  simple 
type.     The  tube,  which  winds  back  and  forth,  has  a  central  electrode  and  at 
frequent  intervals  there  is  pasted  tin  foil  strips  on  the  outside.     When  a  con- 
tact is  made  to  one  of  these  strips  the  tube  lights  up  at  that  point. 

alkaline  earth  oxides.  The  cathode  is  "U"  shaped  and  is 
activated  during  manufacture.  The  lamp  operates  on  about 
350  volts  and  draws  ten  milliamperes. 

It  is  obvious  that  if  lamps  could  be  produced  such  that 
three,  or  at  least  two,  complimentary  colors  could  be  ob- 


66  TELEVISION 

tained  that  we  should  then  have  the  necessary  tools  to  secure 
television  in  natural  colors.  Baird  was  partially  successful 
in  color  television  in  1928.  He  used  a  neon  bulb  for  the 
red  and  a  second  bulb  which  combined  the  greenish-blue 
of  mercury  with  the  blue  of  helium.  The  experiment  was 
a  success  in  so  far  as  the  limitations  of  the  lamps  permitted. 
A  picture  was  sent  first  with  one  color  and  then  with  the 
other,  filters  at  the  sending  end  being  used  to  correspond 
with  the  lamp  colors  at  the  receiving  end.  A  commutator 
in  synchronism  with  the  filter  control  threw  in  first  one  lamp 
and  then  the  other. 

It  would  seem  at  first  thought,  that  a  system  using  three 
lamps  would  require  that  the  television  process  be  increased 
to  a  speed  three  times  that  of  the  single  color  type  to  avoid 
flicker.  As  few  objects  are  of  so  pure  color  as  to  appear 
in  one  picture  and  not  to  appear,  at  least  faintly,  in  another; 
a  much  slower  speed  than  would  be  supposed  was  sufficient. 

Probably  the  only  satisfactory  way  of  describing  the 
operating  characteristics  of  a  glow  lamp  is  to  consider  some 
special  one  as  an  example.  For  convenience  let  us  choose 
the  so-called  Raytheon  Kino  lamp.  (It  should  be  under- 
stood however  that  neither  the  authors  nor  publishers  in 
any  way  recommend  any  particular  piece  of  apparatus.  This 
lamp  is  chosen  only  because  considerable  data  on  its  opera- 
tion is  at  hand  and  because  its  operation  is  typical  of  lamps 
of  this  class.) 

The  Kino  lamp  does  not  attempt  to  reduce  the  neon 
glow  to  a  small  spot  for  focusing,  as  do  some  of  those 
previously  described;  but  rather  spreads  it  out  over  a  large 
surface.  The  intention  in  this  is  that  the  negative  glow 
should  cover  an  area  equal  to  that  of  the  framed  picture 
received.  As  the  plates  are  about  one  and  a  half  inches 
square,  this  is  the  size  of  picture  which  can  be  received  with 
the  lamp.  The  design  is  intended  for  amateur  use.  The 
arrangement  of  the  plates  in  this  lamp  is  such  that  one  may 


GLOW  LAMPS 


67 


view  the  negative  glow  on  one  of  the  plates  without  any 
obstruction  to  vision  from  the  other  plate.  Thus  the  life 
of  the  tube  may  be  prolonged  by  reversing  the  terminals 
when  one  side  of  the  tube  has  become  blackened. 


1.5 


ST/A/O 


5 


10 


20 


30 


40 


50 


60 


70 


D.C. 

(Courtesy  of  Raytheon  Mfg.  Co.) 
FIG.  36. 


These  lamps  are  current  operated.  In  order  to  get 
maximum  contrast  between  the  light  and  shade  of  a  picture 
it  is  necessary  that  their  brightness  change  over  a  maximum 
range  with  current  change.  The  lower  curve,  Fig.  36, 


68 


TELEVISION 


shows  the  relation  between  current  in  milliamperes  and  the 
candle-power.  The  upper  one  shows  the  same  relation  with 
Lamberts.  A  candle-power  is  distinguished  from  a  Lam- 
bert in  that  the  former  is  a  measure  of  the  luminous  inten- 


40 


MA/0  L4MP  CHARACTERISTICS 


30 


10 


10 


30 


40 


20 
/  RMS 

(Courtesy  of  Raytheon  Mfg.  Co.) 

FIG.  37. — As  the  current  increases  the  ratio  of  maximum  brightness  to 
minimum  brightness  increases. 

sity  which  leaves  the  lamp;  while  the  latter  is  measured  by 
the  brightness  of  the  light  producing  surface  itself. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  more  nearly  vertical  these  lines 


GLOW  LAMPS 


69 


the  greater  the  change  of  light  intensity  for  a  given  change 
in  current.  This  then  is  an  important  feature  of  any  such 
lamp.  Straightness  is  also  desirable  in  the  lines,  otherwise 
the  comparison  of  light  and  shade  will  be  distorted.  If  the 


40, 


tf/A/O  LAMP 


30 


10 


A 


» J 


10 


20 


30 


40 


(  Courtesy  of  Raytheon  Mjg.  Co.) 

FIG.  38.  —  The  curve  above  shows  the  relation  of  maximum  brightness  to 
minimum  brightness  from  point  of  view  of  visual  contrast. 

curve  became  horizontal  over  any  portion  it  is  obvious  that 
here,  at  least,  all  variation  of  light  and  shade  would  disap- 
pear in  the  received  image. 


70  TELEVISION 

Furthermore,  since  the  curve  is  a  straight  line  and  since 
the  eye  is  less  sensitive  to  variations  in  light  of  high  intensity 
than  of  low  intensity,  to  run  the  lamp  at  a  high  intensity 
defeats  the  purpose  of  contrast  as  well  as  shortens  the  life 
of  the  device.  It  will  be  seen  however  from  Fig.  37 
that  as  the  current  goes  up  the  value  of  maximum  bright- 
ness to  minimum  brightness  increases.  On  the  other  hand 
the  curve  shown  in  Fig.  38  shows  what  the  relation  is 
from  the  point  of  view  of  visual  contrast;  the  visual  contrast 
being  roughly  proportional  to  the  logarithm  of  the  actual 
contrast.  From  this  it  will  be  seen  that  nothing  much  is 
gained  by  running  the  tube  above  forty  miliiamperes. 

In  the  operation  of  these  lamps  a  background  direct 
current  voltage  is  used  sufficient  to  give  about  ten  or  twenty 
miliiamperes  through  the  tube.  The  alternating  voltage 
from  the  receiving  set  is  impressed  on  this,  but  would  not 
be  sufficient  to  light  the  tube  without  the  assistance  of  the 
d.c.  voltage.  It  is  thus  the  function  of  the  d.c.  voltage 
to  light  the  tube,  whereas  the  a.c.  from  the  receiver  varies 
the  intensity  corresponding  to  the  light  and  shadows  of  the 
scene.  Sometimes,  where  a  dark  background  is  desired, 
the  d.c.  voltage  is  adjusted  just  below  the  starting  value, 
the  additional  a.c.  being  sufficient  to  operate  the  lamp. 

We  have  attempted  to  give  a  fair  picture  of  the  neon 
lamp,  its  characteristics  and  limitations.  In  selecting  a  glow 
lamp  for  television  one  should  consider  thoroughly  all  these 
features  as  they  affect  the  work  in  hand.  The  future  will 
undoubtedly  see  big  advances  in  the  construction  of  such 
lamps.  Greater  intensity,  greater  variation  with  current, 
better  colors  and  longer  life  may  be  expected.  The  lack 
of  suitable  glow  lamps  is  at  the  present  time  one  of  the 
greatest  obstructions  in  television  development. 


CHAPTER  VIII 
OSCILLOGRAPHS 

ONE  of  the  most  useful  relations  between  electricity  and 
magnetism  is  the  fact  that  a  current-carrying  wire  placed 
in  a  magnetic  field  has  a  force  acting  upon  it.  The  direction 
of  this  force  is  given  by  the  so-called  left-hand  rule,  as 
follows:  If  the  left  hand  is  held  so  that  the  thumb  and  two 
first  fingers  are  mutually  at  right  angles  and  if  the  thumb 
points  in  the  direction  of  the  magnetic  field  (north  to  south 
pole),  and  if  the  first  finger  points  in  the  direction  in  which 
the  current  is  flowing,  then  the  second  finger  points  in  the 
direction  in  which  the  force  will  cause  the  wire  to  move. 
Starting  from  the  thumb  we 
have  the  directions  indicated 
as  field,  current,  motion.  This 
is  shown  in  Fig.  39. 

It  will  help  some  in  mem- 
orizing and  understanding  this 

rule  if  we  think  of  the  mag-  J >       Current 

netic  field  as  composed  of  lines 
of  magnetic  force,  the  number 
of  which,  for  any  given  cross- 
sectional  area,  depends  upon  Motlon 

the    Strength    of    the    magnet,       F.IG-  39— The  above  shows  the  rela- 
'  .  ,  tive    directions,    field,    current    and 

the  distance  from  it  and  the  me-  motion, 

dium  in  which  it  exists.  These 

lines  are  thought  of  as  going  from  the  north  to  the  south 
magnetic  pole.  In  the  case  of  a  current-carrying  wire, 
similar  lines  are  considered  to  surround  it,  and  to  run  in  a 

71 


72  TELEVISION 

helix,  proceeding  around  the  wire  in  a  direction  like  that 
of  the  threads  on  a  right-handed  screw.  The  sense  of  these 
lines  would  be  the  same  as  the  direction  of  motion  of  a 
point  on  a  thread,  if  the  screw  were  rotated  in  the  direction 
of  current  flow.  Now  it  will  be  seen,  that  if  the  wire  is 
placed  in  a  magnetic  field,  the  lines  from  this  field  and  from 
the  wire  will  interfere  with  each  other.  Figure  40  shows 
that  at  the  bottom  of  the  wire,  which  is  carrying  current 
into  the  paper,  the  lines  from  the  magnetic  field  and  from 
the  current  interfere  with  each  other;  while  the  reverse  is 
true  at  the  top.  This  will  cause  the  wire  to  move  down,  an 
effect  in  accord  with  the  left-hand  rule.  All  oscillographs 
make  use  of  this  principle. 


WIRE 

FIG.  40. — If  no  current  were  flowing  in  the  wire  the  magnetic  field  between 
the  north  and  south  poles  would  be  nearly  uniform.  If  the  wire  were  out  of 
the  field  of  these  poles  its  lines  would  be  circular  as  they  are  pictured.  When 
these  are  brought  into  the  field  they  result  in  distortion  as  shown  and  there  is 
a  resulting  force  tending  to  push  the  wire  out  of  the  field. 

The  string  oscillograph  is  nothing  more  than  is  illus- 
trated in  Fig.  41.  A  straight  wire  is  stretched  under  ten- 
sion between  the  poles  of  a  powerful  electro-magnet.  As 
the  current  through  the  wire  varies,  the  latter  is  caused  to 
move  from  one  side  to  the  other,  depending  upon  the  direc- 
tion of  the  current.  The  amount  of  movement  depends  upon 
the  value  of  the  current,  the  magnitude  of  the  magnetic 
field  and  the  tension  on  the  wire.  To  produce  a  record 
photographically,  a  hole  is  bored  through  the  pole  pieces  of 
the  magnet  and  a  light  placed  in  line  therewith.  On  the 
opposite  side  of  the  magnet  this  light  casts  a  shadow  of  the 
wire  on  the  photographic  apparatus.  If  the  film  stood  still 


OSCILLOGRAPHS 


73 


there  would  be  a  blur  produced  by  this  shadow;  but  if  it 
is  pulled  through  rapidly  a  curve  is  traced. 

The  instrument  is  extremely  sensitive  and  can  be  used 
for  measuring  changes  in  different  parts  of  the  body  due 
to  the  heart  beat.  It  is  used  constantly  to  diagnose  heart 
troubles.  An  instrument  of  this  type  is  properly  called  an 
Einthoven  galvanometer;  but  is  frequently  called  a  string 
galvanometer;  or  when  used  for  purposes  of  examining  the 
heart,  it  is  called  an  electro-cardiograph. 


FIG.  41. — The  arrangement  of  parts  of  a  string  oscillograph  is  shown  above. 

The  most  common  type  of  oscillograph,  one  which  is 
more  likely  to  prove  useful  in  television  than  the  string  type, 
is  that  which  uses  a  "U"  shaped  loop  of  wire  strung  between 
strong  magnetic  poles.  A  small  light  mirror  is  attached  to 
these  wires  and  is  supported  between  them.  The  current 
goes  down  one  of  these  wires  and  up  the  other;  thus  in 
operation  one  wire  will  tend  to  be  pushed  out  of  the  field 
in  one  direction  and  the  other  will  move  the  opposite  way. 


74 


TELEVISION 


These  combined  motions  turn  the  mirror  and  if  a  spot  of 
light  is  reflected  from  it  the  spot  will  move.  Its  motion 
may  be  observed  visually  from  a  rotating  mirror  or  picked 
up  on  a  moving  film  as  in  the  case  of  a  string  galvanometer. 
While  the  moving  part  is  not  as  light  as  is  the  single  string 
of  the  Einthoven  type,  it  is  sufficiently  light  to  follow  vibra- 
tions of  several  thousand  per  second.  For  this  reason  it 
will  be  seen  that  a  pair  of  such  vibrators  at  right  angles 
could  be  used  for  directing  a  scanning  spot  of  light  and 


FIG.  42. — A  schematic  diagram  showing  the  fundamental  parts  of  an 
oscillograph. 

could  also  be  used  to  reproduce  the  televised  picture  at  the 
receiving  end.  As  the  inertia  of  the  system  to  such  rapid 
motion  is  large,  it  can  only  be  used  with  a  small  screen  and 
in  general  is  not  as  satisfactory  as  other  systems. 

The  means  by  which  an  electric  current  is  carried 
through  a  vacuum,  or  partial  vacuum,  was  described  in  the 
chapter  on  the  neon  lamp.  If  a  vacuum  is  used  a  high 
voltage  is  required  because  in  this  case  the  current  must  be 
carried  entirely  by  electrons  without  the  aid  of  secondary 
ions.  If  the  electrode  is  cold  this  voltage  may  be  fifty 
thousand  volts  or  more.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  the  negative 


OSCILLOGRAPHS  75 

electrode  or  cathode  is  heated  a  relatively  low  voltage,  of 
the  order  of  a  hundred  volts,  is  sufficient.  In  either  case 
the  stream  of  electrons  can  be  sent  through  a  pair  of  pin 


(Courtesy  of  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories.} 

FIG.  43. — The  Du  Four  oscillograph  is  used  to  record  transient  electrical  effects 
of  frequency  as  high  as  one  million  cycles  per  second. 

holes  in  line  with  each  other  and  the  beam  restricted  to  a 
pencil.  These  electrons  will  not  spread  to  any  extent  due 
to  their  mutual  repulsion  as  they  traverse  the  length  of  the 


76  TELEVISION 

tube  in  too  short  a  time  to  make  this  possible  when  high 
voltage  is  used.  With  a  heated  cathode  and  low  voltage 
the  situation  is  different. 

The  electron  beam  directed  through  a  tube  is  in  every 
essential  the  equivalent  of  a  current  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion; consequently  the  stream  of  electrons  must  follow  the 
left-hand  rule.  Thus  if  a  magnetic  field  is  placed  across 
this  beam  it  will  be  deflected,  the  amount  and  direction  of 
the  deflection  being  dependent  upon  the  value  of  the  field 
and  the  velocity  of  the  electrons,  which  in  turn  depends 
upon  the  voltage  across  the  tube.  The  electron  stream  may 
also  be  bent  by  causing  it  to  pass  between  two  condenser 
plates  which  are  oppositely  charged,  the  electrons  being 
repelled  by  the  negative  plate  and  attracted  by  the 
positive. 

The  first  tube  of  this  type  was  built  by  Sir  J.  J.  Thomson 
for  the  purpose  of  measuring  the  relation  of  the  charge  of 
an  electron  to  its  mass  and  it  is  frequently  called  a  Thomson 
tube.  The  first  adaptation  of  this  tube  as  an  oscillograph, 
the  moving  part  being  an  electron  stream,  was  in  the  Braun 
tube.  This  tube  had  the  inner  side  of  one  end  coated  with 
a  substance  which  fluoresced  under  the  action  of  the  electron 
bombardment  so  that  a  spot  of  light  could  be  seen  which 
moved  back  and  forth  with  any  changes  in  the  field  across  the 
electron  path.  As  the  Braun  tube  had  to  be  operated  with  a 
very  high  potential,  it  required  a  correspondingly  large 
change  in  the  magnetic  field  to  bend  the  stream.  Its  useful- 
ness was  consequently  limited. 

Recently  there  has  been  developed  a  new  cathode  ray 
oscillograph  by  Dr.  J.  B.  Johnson  of  the  Bell  Telephone 
Laboratories.  This  type  employs  a  hot  cathode  and  uses 
a  voltage  of  from  300  to  400  volts.  While  the  tube  would 
operate  on  a  lower  voltage,  this  is  used  to  give  the  electrons 
sufficient  velocity  to  cause  a  bright  fluorescent  spot  on  the 
screen.  Little  is  gained  in  brightness  by  the  use  of  higher 


OSCILLOGRAPHS  77 

voltages  but  at  lower  voltages  the  brightness  falls  too  low 
to  be  satisfactory. 

As  has  already  been  said  the  beam  of  electrons  has  a 
tendency  to  scatter  at  this  low  voltage,  as  the  time  to 
traverse  the  tube  is  much  larger  than  at  the  higher  voltages. 
This  is  avoided  by  having  a  low  pressure  of  gas  in  the  tube 
which  is  ionized  along  the  electron  stream.  Both  the  ioniz- 
ing and  dislodged  electron  probably  leave  the  stream;  but 
there  remains  a  positive  ion,  which  because  of  its  great  mass 
relative  to  an  electron,  is  comparatively  sluggish.  Thus 
there  is  built  up  in  the  electron  path  a  pencil  of  positive 
particles  and  the  core  of  the  electron  path  may  be  said  to 
be  a  positive  space-charge.  It  is  estimated  that  at  any  one 
time  during  operation  that  there  are  as  many  as  four  or 
more  positive  ions  for  each  electron  along  the  path.  The 
electrons  move  in  a  tubular  form  inside  of  which  is  a  posi- 
tive space-charge  and  outside  of  which  is  a  blanket  of 
negative  charges  thrown  out  by  the  ionization.  Some  elec- 
trons returning  from  the  target  may  also  be  in  this  outer 
layer.  These  two  space-charges  both  tend  to  hold  the  mov- 
ing electrons  to  a  narrow  beam,  the  one  by  repelling  them 
inward,  the  other  by  attracting  them  inward.  Because  of 
this  anything  that  will  tend  to  increase  the  number  of  ions 
will  tend  to  produce  better  focusing.  Raising  the  tempera- 
ture of  the  filament  will  send  out  a  greater  electron  stream 
which  will  produce  more  ions.  Thus  the  filament  control 
determines  the  sharpness  of  focus.  Argon  is  used  in  the 
tube  as  argon  atoms  are  the  heaviest  that  can  be  used  of 
the  inert  gases.  The  lighter  ions  wander  too  easily  from 
the  electron  track  and  so  focusing  is  more  difficult. 

The  screen  is  made  up  of  equal  parts  of  calcium  tung- 
state  and  zinc  silicate,  both  of  which  are  specially  prepared 
for  fluorescence.  The  tungstate  gives  a  deep  blue  light  and 
the  silicate,  a  yellow-green.  The  former  is  almost  thirty 
times  as  effective  on  a  photographic  plate  as  the  latter;  but 


78  TELEVISION 

the  silicate  is  many  times  brighter  visually  than  the  tung- 
state.  A  mixture  of  equal  parts  gives  an  excellent  all- 
purpose  screen. 

The  tube  fits  into  a  bayonet  type  radio  socket  to  which 
all  connections  are  made.  It  is  fitted  with  two  pairs  of 
deflector  plates.  All  variations,  which  may  best  be  meas- 
ured by  their  voltage  effect,  may  be  connected  to  these.  A 
magnetic  coil  outside  the  glass  of  the  tube  may  be  used  for 
measurements  of  current  variation. 

It  is  not  difficult  to  see  how  this  tube  might  be  used  at 
the  receiving  end  of  a  television  system.  The  electron  beam 
is  limited  somewhat  in  its  rate  of  movement  by  the  possibility 
of  leaving  the  positive  ions  behind  at  the  expense  of  the 
focus.  For  all  practical  purposes,  however,  the  effect  is  nil. 
Inertia  then  is  not  a  problem;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  in- 
tensity of  illumination  is.  Perhaps  if  more  intense  beams 
can  be  produced  this  device  may  become  an  important  factor 
in  television  reception. 

A  novel  use  of  an  oscillograph  of  this  type  has  been  sug- 
gested by  A.  A.  Campbell  Swinton.  At  the  receiving  end 
the  cathode-ray  oscillograph  is  of  the  standard  type  with 
heated  filament  and  fluorescent  screen;  but  with  two  pairs  of 
magnetic  coils,  so  arranged  that  their  fields  are  at  right 
angles  to  each  other.  That  pair  which  controls  the  transverse 
motion  of  the  beam  has  an  alternating  current  through  it  of 
a  frequency  of  about  800  cycles  and  that  which  controls  the 
up  and  down  motion  a  frequency  of  about  ten  cycles.  Thus 
the  beam  is  made  to  traverse  the  screen  as  in  any  receiving 
mechanism;  but  it  is  free  from  parts  having  mechanical 
inertia. 

At  the  sending  end  the  tube  is  of  a  somewhat  different 
construction;  for  although  the  cathode  ray  beam  is  con- 
trolled in  the  same  manner  as  that  already  described,  it  falls 
upon  a  screen  which  is  composed  of  a  great  number  of  small 
cubes.  The  cubes  forming  the  mosaic  are  insulated  from 


OSCILLOGRAPHS 


79 


each  other  and  contain  some  photoelectric  substance;  such, 
for  example,  as  is  used  in  making  photoelectric  cells.  An 
image  of  the  scene  to  be  projected  is  focused  on  this  mosaic, 
and  parts  which  are  strongly  illuminated  give  off  more  elec- 
trons than  those  on  which  the  darker  parts  of  the  image  fall. 


FIG.  44. — The  circuit  shown  above  is  similar  to  that  suggested  by  A.  A. 
Campbell  Swinton.  Light  from  the  object,  represented  by  an  arrow,  passes 
through  the  lens,  through  a  metal  gauze,  and  then  through  the  vapor  chamber 
to  the  photoelectric  cell.  The  cell,  in  reality,  is  a  mosaic  of  separate 

small  cells. 

Behind  this  mosaic  is  a  second  chamber  which  contains 
sodium  vapor,  or  any  other  vapor  whose  conductivity  in- 
creases under  the  action  of  light.  When  the  cathode-ray 
falls  upon  one  of  the  cubes  of  the  screen  the  beam  passes 


8o  TELEVISION 

through  it  into  the  second  chamber  and  across  to  the  final 
plate  electrode.  A  current  follows  this  beam  from  the  cube 
over  to  the  plate  connected  to  the  grid  of  a  vacuum  tube 
which  it  actuates  in  the  usual  manner.  The  current  passing 
depends  upon  the  number  of  electrons  given  off  from  the 
cube  which,  in  turn,  depends  upon  the  intensity  of  the 
illumination  falling  upon  it. 

While  this  system  has  never  been  put  into  actual  practice 
it  would  appear  to  be  one  which  may  eventually  solve  most 
of  our  present-day  television  problems.  Its  chief  drawback 
is  in  the  lack  of  a  sufficiently  intense  cathode-ray  beam  which 
can  be  supplied  at  a  reasonably  low  voltage. 


CHAPTER  IX 
SCANNING 

IN  some  of  the  early  experiments  on  television  an  at- 
tempt was  made  to  duplicate  the  action  of  the  eye,  to  view 
a  picture  as  a  whole  and  to  transmit  each  portion  of  it 
separately.  In  the  attempt  to  do  this,  a  honeycomb  struc- 
ture of  selenium  cells  was  made  and  the  object  placed  in 
front  of  it.  Each  selenium  cell  was  connected  by  its  own 
pair  of  wires  to  the  receiving  system  which  consisted  of  a 
number  of  lights  behind  shutters.  Light  falling  upon  one 
of  the  selenium  cells  caused  the  corresponding  shutter  to 
open  and  in  this  way  a  crude  resemblance  of  the  object  was 
produced.  Rignoux  and  Fournier  constructed  such  a  system 
in  1906  which  consisted  of  sixty-four  cells.  Both  Ruhmer 
and  Baird  also  constructed  similar  systems. 

But  the  rods  and  cones  which  constituted  the  electrical 
detectors  in  the  eye  number  up  into  the  millions  and  it  is 
obvious  that  to  attack  television  from  this  angle  is  rather 
hopeless.  We  should  have  to  produce  photoelectric  devices 
of  extremely  small  size  and  at  the  receiving  end  have  a 
compact  screen  of  neon  lamps  of  much  greater  efficiency 
than  those  now  in  use  and  of  a  size  so  infinitesimal  as  to  be 
beyond  hope.  In  addition  each  of  these  tiny  cells  would 
have  to  be  connected  with  a  pair  of  wires  to  the  correspond- 
ing lamp.  This  would  require  an  immense  cable  of  many 
thousands  of  wires. 

As  a  result  of  these  insurmountable  difficulties  the  trend 
in  television  has  taken  a  direction  somewhat  away  from  any 
attempt  to  duplicate  the  human  eye.  The  modern  method 

81 


TELEVISION 


requires  that  small  portions  of  the  picture  be  sent  separately 
and  in  rapid  succession  over  a  single  pair  of  wires.  The 
resultant  picture  is  thus  made  up  of  a  large  number  of  pieces 
which  have  been  separately  transmitted. 

In  picture  transmission  no  great  difficulty  is  encountered 
in  this  method.  Either  a  spot  of  light  is  sent  through  a 
transparency  or  is  reflected  from  an  opaque  picture  onto 

a  photoelectric  cell.  If  the 
picture  is  placed  on  a  ro- 
tating drum,  which  revolves 
on  a  screw,  the  spot  will 
follow  a  spiral  path  as  the 
drum  advances.  The  varia- 
tions in  the  amplified  photo- 
electric current  may  be 
made  to  operate  a  magnetic 
shutter,  or  some  form  of 
oscillograph,  to  produce 
varying  light  intensity.  Fre- 
quently a  light  beam  of 
varying  width  is  used.  This 
produces  a  picture  made  up 
of  lines  of  varying  width  as 
shown  in  Fig.  45.  Varia- 
tions of  this  general  scheme 
are  numerous. 

When  we  come  to  tele- 
vision, however,  we  have 
before  us  the  problem  of 
greatly  increased  speed  of  sending  and  the  difficulty  of  put- 
ting our  object  on  a  revolving  drum,  a  method  which  would 
first  require  photographing.  The  revolving  drum  must 
accordingly  be  dispensed  with  and  other  means  substituted. 
Perhaps  the  simplest  scheme  is  that  used  by  the  Bell 
Telephone  Laboratories  which  is  shown  diagrammatically 


FIG.  45. — Close  examination  will  show 
that  this  picture  is  made  up  of  a 
number  of  horizo^aMines  of  varying 


SCANNING  83 

in  Fig.  46.  Light  from  an  intense  source  is  focused  by  a 
lens  in  such  a  manner  that  it  illuminates  the  whole  opening 
in  a  frame  placed  next  to  the  disc.  In  the  figure  the  source 
of  light  is  shown  as  an  arc.  The  frame  should  be  of  such 
a  size  that  its  length  is  equal  to  the  distance  between  holes 
in  the  disc,  and  its  height  should  be  the  difference  between 
the  radii  of  the  inner  and  outer  holes.  If  the  wheel  is  sta- 
tionary, light  will  come  through  a  single  hole  in  the  disc 
and  there  will  be  but  one  spot  of  light  striking  the  face  of 
the  subject.  This  will  be  true  regardless  of  the  position  of 
the  wheel.  The  holes  are  arranged  on  a  spiral  in  such  a 


Photo-Electric 
Cell 


Scene 


Lamp 


FIG.  46. — Above  is  shown  the  simple  scanning  system  employed  by  the  Bell 
Telephone  Laboratories. 

relation  to  the  frame  that  the  outermost  hole  is  level  with 
the  top  of  the  frame  and  they  run  progressively  downward 
until  the  innermost  hole,  that  nearest  the  axle,  is  level  with 
the  bottom  of  the  frame.  Thus  when  the  disc  is  turned  the 
light  passing  through  the  holes  makes  successive  strips 
across  the  subject  so  that  in  one  complete  turn  every  part 
of  the  subject  has  been  passed  over  by  a  light  spot.  The 
subject  has  been  completely  scanned.  As  the  variations  in 
intensity  of  reflected  light  take  place,  three  photoelectric 
cells,  only  one  of  which  is  shown,  produce  varying  current 
intensity.  A  row  of  holes  running  diagonally  across  a  con- 


84  TELEVISION 

tinuous  belt  would  perform  the  same  service;  but  difficulties 
resulting  from  stretching  or  slipping  would  obviously  enter 
here.  As  it  has  no  advantage  over  the  wheel  except  the 
compactness  which  can  be  procured  by  suitable  pulley 
arrangements,  it  is  confined  to  laboratory  and  amateur  use. 
In  the  case  of  the  circular  disc  it  is  advisable  to  make  the 
holes  radial  and  not  circular,  as  the  latter  system  is  inclined 
to  emphasize  the  strips.  More  light  enters  through  the 
centers  of  the  holes,  i.e.,  across  their  diameters,  than  enters 
at  the  inner  and  outer  edges  of  the  holes.  For  this  reason 
they  should  be  four  sided  and  bounded  by  radii  and  con- 
centric circles  for  best  results. 

When  a  spot  of  light  is  used  for  scanning  it  is  not  neces- 
sary that  the  scene  to  be  scanned  should  be  in  darkness. 
The  entire  scene  may  be  illuminated  without  interfering  with 
the  action  of  the  intense  scanning  spot.  This  of  course 
introduces  a  background  of  illumination  whose  effect  on  the 
photo-electric  cell  is  to  produce  a  constant  background  of 
current  upon  which  the  variations  due  to  the  scanning  spot 
are  superimposed.  It  might  be  suggested  that  an  intense 
beam  of  light  traversing  the  face  of  a  subject  would  produce 
discomfort,  but  such  is  not  the  case.  As  the  spot  must  scan 
the  entire  face  in  less  than  one-tenth  of  a  second,  if  it  is  to 
be  transmitted,  and  as  the  eye  is  not  responsive  to  changes 
that  take  place  in  less  time  than  this,  it  follows  that  the 
eye  does  not  recognize  the  spot  of  light  as  such.  The  spot 
rests  upon  each  portion  of  the  scene  only  about  one  twenty- 
five-hundredth  of  the  complete  time  for  scanning,  so  that 
the  eye  recognizes  only  an  increase  in  general  illumination 
of  one  twenty-five  hundredth  that  of  the  beam  when 
stationary.  The  scanning  process  is  so  rapid  that  it  is  not 
recognized  by  the  subject  as  such. 

The  second  system  to  be  described  is  that  due  to  Dr. 
E.  F.  W.  Alexanderson  of  the  General  Electric  Company. 
This  consists  essentially  of  a  large  wheel  on  whose  rim 


SCANNING  85 

is  mounted  a  number  of  mirrors  each  one  of  which  varies 
slightly  in  angle  with  the  next.  Thus  one  mirror  will  throw 
a  spot  of  light  at  one  point  on  a  screen,  the  next  one  will 
throw  it  just  to  one  side  of  this  and  so  on  across  the  screen. 
When  the  wheel  revolves  a  spot  will  be  carried  from  top  to 
bottom  of  the  screen  by  reflection  from  one  mirror.  The 
next  mirror  will  then  come  into  play  and  will  cover  the 
succeeding  strip  and  so  on.  Thus  the  entire  screen  is 
covered.  In  principle  the  procedure  is  the  same  as  that  used 
in  the  disc  with  spiral  holes.  In  order  to  adequately  cover 
a  large  screen,  however,  seven  spots  of  light  are  used  in 
this  system  so  that  the  speed  of  the  drum  may  be  reduced 
to  a  reasonable  value  and  the  illumination  correspondingly 
increased. 

A  third  system  of  scanning  by  means  of  a  light  spot  'is 
that  devised  by  M.  Dauvillier.  In  this  system  two  elec- 
trically driven  tuning  forks  with  their  prongs  at  right  angles 
are  used.  One  vibrates  eight-hundred  hmes  a  second  and 
the  other  but  ten  times.  If  the  high  frequency  fork  produced 
the  spot  alone  it  would  traverse  the  screen  back  and  forth 
800  times  a  second.  If  the  slower  fork  were  used  it  would 
move  over  the  screen  up  and  down  ten  times  per  second.  With 
both  forks  vibrating  it  does  both  these  things,  traversing  the 
screen  rapidly  and  at  the  same  time  moving  up  and  down. 
Thus  the  entire  screen  is  scanned  ten  times  per  second.  In 
this  system  there  exists  the  possibility  of  using  the  current 
which  drives  these  forks  for  synchronizing.  A  pair  of 
oscillograph  systems  at  right  angles  may  also  be  used  for 
scanning. 

We  now  come  to  a  somewhat  different  system,  one  in 
which  the  illumination  is  uniform  and  is  not  projected  in  a 
pencil.  Here  the  scanning  disc  is  placed  between  the  scene 
and  the  photoelectric  cell,  whereas  in  all  those  systems  so 
far  described,  it  was  between  the  source  and  the  scene.  The 
use  of  the  disc  between  the  cell  and  scene,  as  used  in  early 


86 


TELEVISION 


experiments,  was  one  of  the  great  drawbacks  as  an  extraor- 
dinarily intense  illumination  was  necessary.  So  much  was 
this  the  truth  that  in  Baird's  first  experiments  dummies  were 
used  because  of  the  heat  and  glare.  With  improved  photo- 
electric cells,  however,  this  condition  is  no  longer  true. 

In  the  Baird  system  in  place  of  a  spiral  of  holes,  as 
previously  described,  a  spiral  of  lenses  was  used.  This  of 
course  gives  greatly  increased  light  collecting  ability.  Di- 


FIG.  47. — Scanning  arrangement  used  in  the  Baird  system. 

rectly  behind  this,  revolving  at  high  speed,  was  placed  a 
slotted  disc  which  might  be  called  a  chopper  since  it  suc- 
cessively cuts  off  the  light  and  allows  it  to  go  through.  Be- 
hind this  is  another  rotating  wheel  in  which  a  spiral  is  cut. 
The  arrangement  is  shown  in  Fig.  47. 

The  first  disc,  carrying  the  lenses,  rotates  at  about  800 
revolutions  per  minute  and  the  slotted  disc  at  about  4000 


SCANNING 


r.p.m.  The  effect  of  the  slotted  disc  is  to  break  the  light 
up  into  separate  light  impulses  which  produce  separate  elec- 
trical impulses  in  the  circuit.  This  has  an  advantage  where  the 
changes  in  intensity  are  slight  or  zero;  for,  in  this  case,  we 
would  otherwise  have  the  equivalent  of  direct  current  am- 
plification beyond  the  photoelectric  cell — this  is  known  to 
be  a  difficult  problem. 

The  rotating  spiral,  as  will  be  seen  from  the  mounting 
shown  in  the  figure,   is  of  relatively  slow  speed.      If  the 


FIG.  480. 


FIG.  48  b. 

FIG.  48. — As  shown  in  a  and  b,  the  rotation  of  the  slotted  disc  throws  various 

portions  of  the  scene  onto  the  photoelectric  cell.     It  thus  serves  to  divide  it  up 

into  smaller  portions  than  would  be  the  case  with  the  lens  disc  alone. 

lens  disc  were  stationary  and  this  spiral  disc  were  revolved, 
it  will  be  seen  that  different  parts  of  the  scene  would  be 
projected  through  the  spiral  to  the  photoelectric  cell. 
Figure  48  shows  the  disc  in  two  extreme  positions.  Figure 
48  (a)  shows  the  spiral  at  its  innermost  portion  which 
throws  the  head  of  the  arrow  on  the  cell.  Figure  48  (b) 
shows  it  at  its  outermost  point,  so  that  the  tail  of  the  arrow 
strikes  the  cell.  As  the  lens  sweeps  across  the  scene  the 
rotation  of  this  disc  has  the  effect  of  dividing  the  image 
produced  into  additional  finer  strips.  With  the  combination 


88 


TELEVISION  ' 


it  becomes  possible  to  make  the  strips  so  numerous  as  to  be 
little  noticed. 

A  second  system  of  scanning,  devised  by  Baird,  is  known 
as  the  optical  lever.  This  system  has  the  effect  of  greatly 
increasing  the  speed  of  scanning  without  increasing  the  speed 
of  the  mechanism  over  that  of  other  systems.  In  this  system 
the  transverse  scanning  of  the  scene  is  done  by  two  or  more 
lens  discs  rotating  in  opposite  directions;  the  up  and  down 
movement  is  provided  by  a  final  lens  disc.  The  arrange- 
ment is  shown  in  Fig.  49.  The  image  is  thrown  on  a 
ground  glass  between  each  pair  of  discs  placed  as  shown 
in  the  picture.  It  may  not  at  first  be  evident  that  rotating 


FIG.  49. — This  shows  the  Baird  optical  lever.    The  scanned  image  is  thrown 

onto  a  ground  glass  indicated  by  the  vertical  dotted  line.    This  is  scanned  by 

a  second  disc  and  so  on.    The  last  disc  supplies  the  up  and  down  motion. 

the  discs  in  opposite  directions  will  speed  up  the  scanning 
process;  but  considering  Fig.  50  should  make  it  clear. 

Figure  50  (a)  shows  what  happens  to  the  image  of  an 
object  when  the  lens  is  moved  a  short  distance.  The  full 
line  represents  the  original  position;  the  dotted  line  repre- 
sents the  position  after  the  lens  has  been  moved.  Now  let 
us  consider  a  pair  of  lenses,  A  and  B,  with  the  ground  glass 
G  between  them  as  shown.  (Figure  50  (b) .)  The  lens  A 
will  throw  an  image  on  the  ground  glass  and  this  in  turn 
will  be  picked  up  and  projected  by  the  lens  B  as  shown. 
Now  suppose  we  move  each  lens  a  distance  which  we  will 
call  x,  and  which  is  identical  with  the  distance  the  lens  was 
moved  in  Fig.  50  (a).  The  full  line  and  dotted  positions 
again  record  the  locations  before  and  after  the  lenses  were 


SCANNING  89 

moved.  It  will  be  seen  here  that  the  final  image  has  been 
moved  over  a  much  greater  distance  than  was  the  case  in 
Fig.  50  (a).  This  gives  the  effect  of  a  greatly  increased 
speed  of  scanning;  yet  the  lens  discs  move  at  a  relatively 
low  speed.  This  process  can  be  carried  on  through  addi- 
tional stages  but  it  is  limited  by  the  rapid  diminution  of 
light  as  we  pass  from  one  lens  disc  to  the  next. 


FIG.  50. — Moving  a  single  lens  will  displace  the  image  /  as  shown  in  a, 
but  moving  two  lenses  A  and  B  in  opposite  directions  will  give  a  greater 
displacement  as  shown.  B  picks  up  the  image  from  the  ground  glass  screen  G. 

The  Jenkins  system  uses  what  is  in  effect  a  variable 
prism  to  bend  a  spot  of  light  from  one  side  of  the  scene  to 
the  other,  and  another  similar  one  to  move  it  up  and  down. 
The  bending  of  light  by  a  prism  is  a  familiar  phenomenon 
and  was  described  in  Chapter  III.  The  variable  prism  is 
ground  into  the  edge  of  a  glass  disc.  The  disc  is  bevelled 
off  at  one  point  so  that  it  forms  a  fairly  sharp  edge  on  the 
glass;  as  we  go  along  the  rim  the  angle  of  the  bevel  gradually 
becomes  less  and  less,  until,  halfway  around,  the  two  sides 


9o 


TELEVISION 


of  the  disc  are  parallel.  As  we  continue  the  angle  slopes 
the  other  way  so  that  the  rim  which  constitutes  the  prism 
cuts  into  the  glass  deeper  and  deeper.  At  the  completion 
of  the  revolution  the  rim  is  almost 
severed  from  the  main  part  of  the  disc. 
In  practice  one  of  these  discs  is  used 
to  traverse  the  picture  and  another  to 
move  the  light  up  and  down.  The  two 
are  so  placed  that  at  one  point  the  two 
rims  are  traveling  at  right  angles.  The 
scene  is  viewed  through  the  discs  at  this 
point.  A  cross-section  of  one  of  these 
discs  is  shown  in  Fig.  51  (a)  and  the 
relation  of  the  discs  when  in  use  is  shown 
in  Fig.  51  (/?).  The  disc  for  trans- 
_  _  verse  scanning  runs  at  high  speed  and 
the  one  to  produce  the  up  and  down 
motion  runs  relatively  slow.  The  sys- 
tem apart  from  the  prismatic  disc  is  simi- 
lar to  the  others  previously  described. 
A  suggested  form  of  television  de- 
pends upon  a  cathode-ray  oscillograph 


FIG.    51  a. — A    cross-sec- 
tion     of      the      Jenkins 
scanning  disc. 


Fie.  51  b. 


both  for  transmitting  and  receiving.  As  this  is  a  highly 
specialized  use  of  a  cathode  ray-oscillograph  and  differs  very 
materially  from  all  other  systems  of  scanning  it  has  already 
been  described  in  the  chapter  dealing  with  oscillographs. 


CHAPTER  X 
SYNCHRONIZATION 

THE  process  of  television,  and  that  of  telephotography, 
requires  that  the  sending  and  the  reception  of  the  image 
or  photograph  occur  in  unison.  This  operation  is  known 
as  synchronization — equal  timing.  The  term  immediately 
suggests  something  in  the  nature  of  a  clock  control.  This, 
in  essence,  is  exactly  the  system  at  first  employed.  In  order 
to  understand  the  difficulties  to  which  it  is  subject,  let  us 
consider  the  method  in  some  detail. 

In  passing,  perhaps,  some  mention  should  be  made  of 
devices  whose  speed  is  controlled  by  a  fly-ball  governor — 
for  example  the  common  phonograph  motor.  Although 
these  may  be  suitable  for  the  motive  power  of  telephoto- 
cylinders,  they  are  subject  to  too  much  variation  in  speed 
to  be  used  without  the  checking  action  of  some  synchronizing 
system. 

Timepieces  are  controlled  in  two  ways:  either  by  a 
pendulum  or  by  a  hairspring.  The  latter  requires  less  space 
and  will  function  in  any  position;  hence  is  best  adapted  to 
portable  mechanisms,  such  as  watches.  The  pendulum  on  the 
other  hand,  must  be  kept  in  a  vertical  plane  but  is  con- 
siderably simpler  in  construction  and  easier  to  make  reliable; 
hence  is  almost  universally  used  in  stationary  clocks.  Both 
methods  of  regulation  are  subject  to  errors  produced  by 
temperature  changes.  The  trouble  may  be  corrected  by  suit- 
able compensation  devices,  both  for  the  hairspring  and  the 
pendulum;  although,  in  general,  automatic  compensation  is 
cumbersome  as  well  as  expensive. 

91 


92  TELEVISION 

Since  the  pendulum  has  the  merit  of  great  simplicity, 
workers  in  the  field  of  picture  transmission  early  attempted 
to  employ  it  for  synchronizing  their  sending  and  receiving 
mechanisms.  There  are  two  possible  ways  to  do  this.  We 
may  use  two  pendulums,  one  at  each  end  of  the  line;  or  we 
may  employ  only  one  pendulum,  located  at  the  transmitter 
and  sending  a  synchronizing  signal,  in  the  form  of  an  electric 
current,  to  the  reception  apparatus.  At  first  glance,  the 
former  might  appear  to  be  the  simpler  scheme,  since  no 
energy  link  between  the  two  stations  is  entailed.  Attempts 
to  put  the  method  into  practice  were  made  by  a  number  of 
early  investigators;  but  without  much  success. 

To  a  first  approximation,  we  may  say  that  the  period 
of  a  pendulum  depends  on  its  length;  which,  however,  is 
altered  slightly  by  temperature  changes.  Where  the  two 
instruments  are  not  used  in  the  same  location,  it  is  important 
to  remember  that  the  acceleration  of  gravity  is  also  a  factor 
in  determining  their  periods  and  that  the  value  of  that  factor 
varies  from  point  to  point  on  the  earth's  surface.  Hence 
the  difficulty  of  maintaining  accurate  unison  between  two 
isolated  mechanisms  of  this  type  proved  well-nigh  insur- 
mountable. 

Turning  to  the  second  method,  mentioned  above,  syn- 
chronization by  a  single  pendulum,  consider  the  apparatus 
described  by  T.  T.  Baker.1  "One  pendulum  has  been  used 
at  the  transmitting  station,  the  rod  being  fitted  with  a  spring 
contact  which  strikes  a  second  contact  at  the  end  of  each 
swing.  This  striking  of  the  contacts  throws  into  circuit  a 
relay,  which  actuates  an  electro-magnet,  and  thus  releases 
the  cylinder.  The  receiver  is  also  fitted  with  a  similar  electro- 
magnet release  and  relay,  and  both  relays  are  connected  in 
series  through  the  telegraph  line,  the  one  pendulum  thus 
operating  the  synchronizing  devices  on  both  instruments.  In 

1T.  T.  Baker— "Wireless  Pictures  and  Television,"  p.  58  et  seq. 


SYNCHRONIZATION  93 

this  way  any  fluctuations  in  period  of  swing  become  im- 
material." 

Since  for  commercial  telephotography  speed  is  extremely 
important,  we  shall  find  a  tendency  to  run  both  cylinders  as 
rapidly  as  the  receiving  and  recording  operations  can  be 
performed.  With  the  advent  of  the  photoelectric  cell  and 
the  neon  lamp,  both  inertia-free,  came  the  possibility  of 
very  much  more  rapid  operation.  So  that  the  rotation  of 
the  cylinders,  between  the  synchronizing  action  of  successive 
pendulum  swings,  would  be  quite  appreciable.  In  other 


1 

t 


FIG.  52. — Electrically  driven  tuning  fork. 

words  it  would  be  possible  for  them  to  get  considerably  out 
of  step  with  each  other,  thus  distorting  the  reproduction. 
To  avoid  this  a  control  is  needed  which  is  not  only  definitely 
periodic  in  nature,  but  whose  period  is  also  very  rapid. 

The  tuning  fork  answers  these  qualifications.  Its  period 
depends  on  the  density  of  the  material  and  shape  of  the 
fork,  fluctuates  but  slightly  with  temperature  and  may  be 
made  very  much  more  rapid  than  that  of  a  pendulum. 
Figure  52  shows  the  way  in  which  a  tuning  fork  can  be 
electrically  driven.  The  system  is  not  so  very  different  from 


94 


TELEVISION 


that  used  in  the  common  electric  bell,  the  electro-magnet 
supplies  the  necessary  energy  to  keep  the  fork  vibrating; 
whereas  the  time  at  which  current  flows  through  the  circuit 
is  determined  by  the  period  of  the  fork.  We  have,  then,  a 
fixed  current  frequency  which  must  be  utilized  to  check  the 
speed  of  rotation  of  the  cylinders. 

A  good  example  of  the  way  in  which  an  electrically 
driven  tuning  fork  may  be  used  for  timing  purposes  is  seen 
in  the  apparatus  of  Captain  R.  H.  Ranger,  used  by  the 
Radio  Corporation  of  America  for  picture  transmission 


FIG.  53. — Schematic  diagram  of  circuit  used  for  synchronization  in  the  Ranger 

system.    Neon  tube,  at  upper  left,  is  connected  to  motor  shaft,  at  upper  right, 

and  is  used  as  a  stroboscope. 

from  New  York  to  London.  Figure  10.02  gives  the  details 
of  the  circuit  used.  In  this  case  the  fork  is  encased  in  a 
constant  temperature  box  to  obviate  the  variations  in  the 
period  of  the  fork  produced  by  the  expansion  or  contraction 
of  the  metal.  For  simplicity  this  detail  of  the  apparatus 
is  omitted  in  Fig.  53.  The  general  appearance  of  the 
temperature  control  system  is  illustrated  separately  in  Fig. 
54.  The  period  of  the  fork  is  further  checked  by 
an  electro-magnetic  control  operated  from  an  accurate 


SYNCHRONIZATION 


95 


chronometer.      (Note  circuit  containing  crown  piece  above 
prongs  of  the  tuning  fork.) 

The  frequency  of  the  fork  is  used  to  check  any  cumula- 
tive  variation   in   speed   of   the   direct-current,    shunt   field 


'*WW 


(Courtesy  of  Radio  Corporation  of  America. 

FIG.  54. — Mounting  of  synchronizing  tuning  fork  in  constant  temperature  box. 

Ranger  system. 


96  TELEVISION 

motor  which  drives  the  transmission  or  reception  cylinder. 
The  motor  is  designed  for  a  speed  of  2100  revolutions  per 
minute,  whereas  the  frequency  of  the  forks  is  4200;  so  that 
the  controlling  action  is  brought  into  play  twice  each  revolu- 
tion of  the  motor.  It  will  be  noticed  from  the  diagram  that 
in  one  position  of  the  tuning  fork  prongs,  the  shunt  field 
of  the  motor  is  placed  in  parallel  with  the  almost  negligible 
resistance  of  the  auxiliary  commutator  segments  and  slip 
rings,  this  will  greatly  decrease  the  field  current,  thereby 
tending  to  speed  up  the  machine.  At  the  next  position  of 
the  fork,  however,  the  variable  resistance  in  series  with  the 
field  is  shorted,  so  that  an  increase  in  field  current  will 
occur;  thus  tending  to  retard  the  motor.  By  these  extremely 
rapid  fluctuations  in  field  current,  the  common  proclivity  of 
electric  motors  to  "hunt" — that  is  change  speed  cumulatively 
due  to  some  slight  variation  in  line  current — is  pre- 
vented. 

The  neon  tube,  seen  at  the  left  of  Fig.  53,  is  em- 
ployed as  a  method  of  determining  visibly  whether  the 
motor  is  running  at  correct  speed  or  not.  The  tube  is 
connected  mechanically  to  the  end  of  the  motor  shaft  so  as 
to  revolve  at  the  same  speed  as  the  motor.  Electrically  it 
is  connected  with  the  tuning  fork  circuit  so  that  a  discharge 
is  produced  for  each  vibration  of  the  fork.  When  the  motor 
is  running  at  correct  speed,  the  tube  should  light  exactly 
twice  each  revolution.  That  is  to  say  it  should  be  illuminated 
at  the  same  two  positions  every  revolution.  Since  the  speed 
is  too  rapid  for  an  observer  to  receive  distinct  impressions 
of  each  flash  and  since  each  occurs  for  the  same  position, 
the  tube  will  appear  as  if  stationary.  If  the  motor  is  turning 
too  slowly,  successive  discharges  will  occur  closer  together 
in  the  circular  path;  hence  the  tube  will  appear  to  gradually 
rotate  backwards.  On  the  other  hand  when  the  motor  speed 
is  too  high,  the  tube  will  seem  to  rotate  slowly  in  the  same 
direction  as  the  machine.  A  device  of  this  type,  a  strobo- 


SYNCHRONIZATION 


97 


scope,  is  helpful  in  many  places  where  one  desires  to  check 
high  rotary  speeds. 

Although  the  tuning  fork  represents  a  decided  advance- 
ment over  the  pendulum  for  a  synchronizing  control,  some- 
thing of  greater  simplicity  is  desirable  for  the  high  speeds 
necessary  in  television.  The  most  common  system  is  to 
employ  alternating-current  synchronous  motors.  The  prin- 
ciple of  their  operation  may  be  understood  by  reference  to 
Fig.  55.  In  this  case  alternating  current  is  sent  through 
the  stationary  electro-magnet,  the  stator.  The  drum,  or 


t 


ROTOR 


STATOR 


FIG.  55. — Simple  phonic  drum.    This  illustrates  the  fundamental  construction 
of  a  synchronous  A.  C.  motor. 

rotor,  may  be  made  of  wood  carrying  bars  of  iron  on  the 
circumference.  The  periodic  magnetization  of  the  stator 
will  cause  the  iron  strips  of  the  rotor  to  be  pulled  around 
at  a  speed  dependent  on  the  frequency  of  the  current  supply. 
In  practice  the  arrangement  is  often  changed  so  that  a.c. 
is  sent  through  the  rotating  armature  and  d.c.  is  used  in 
the  stationary  field.  The  speed  of  rotation  then  depends 
on  the  frequency  of  the  alternating  supply  and  the  number 
of  field  coils. 

Synchronous  motors  of  this  type  might  conceivably  be 
used  in  two  ways:  either  transmitter  and  receiver  could  be 


TELEVISION 


controlled  by  the  same  constant  frequency  generator,  or  the 
transmitter  could  be  made  to  generate  the  frequency  which 
controls  the  receiver.  Both  methods  require  another  energy 
link  between  the  two  stations  in  addition  to  that  which 
carries  the  image.  So  that  the  television  receiver,  unlike  the 
radio  set,  must  be  designed  to  receive  two  distinct  signals 

simultaneously.  To  make 
this  possible,  two  different 
carrier  wave  bands  must  be 
transmitted — one  modu- 
lated by  the  scanning  proc- 
ess; the  other,  by  the 
synchronizing  generator. 
Since  only  very  small 
quantities  of  energy  can 
be  sent  from  station  to 
station  by  means  of  radio 
wraves,  it  will  be  necessary 
not  only  to  amplify  the 
synchronizing  signal  for 
control  purposes,  but  to 
supply  auxiliary  power  to 
actually  drive  the  receiv- 
ing disc.  To  illustrate, 
let  us  consider  a  system 

FIG.    56. — Scanning-disc  motor   and   speed         •    •       11      j  ^u      T7 

control.     The  large  unit,  near  the  disc,  is  Originally  due  tO   the  Eng- 

the  d.  c.  drive  motor;  the  smaller  unit,  at  lish   inventor,   Baird. 
the   base   of   the   same   shaft,    is   the   syn-  r^,  ,.          -    . 

chronous  motor  used  as  a  speed  control.  I  he  scanning  disc  ot  the 

sending  station  is  driven  by 

a  d.c.  motor  to  whose  drive  shaft  is  coupled  a  small  a.c. 
synchronous  generator.  In  this  way,  any  tendency  of  the 
motor  to  vary  in  speed  will  be  reflected  in  a  corresponding 
variation  of  the  frequency  of  the  current  generated  by  the 
a.c.  unit  which  is  used  to  modulate  the  synchronizing 
carrier  wave.  It  will  be  clear  that  by  reversing  the  process 


SYNCHRONIZATION  99 

at  the  receiving  end,  we  should  be  able  to  keep  the  two 
scanning  discs  turning  at  the  same  rate  of  speed  at  any 
instant;  albeit  the  speed  may  not  be  constant.  Figure  56 
shows  a  skeleton  view  of  the  main  drive  for  the  scanning 
disc  at  the  receiver  and  its  synchronous  control  motor.  Here 
a.c.  and  d.c.  units  are  again  mounted  on  the  same  shaft; 
although  this  time  both  are  motors.  The  d.c.  motor  sup- 
plies the  power  to  drive  the  scanning  disc;  but  without  con- 
trol, would  be  subject  to  speed  variations.  However,  the 
speed  of  the  a.c.  unit  depends  upon  the  input  frequency 
which  comes  from  the  amplified  synchronizing  signal  as 
received  from  the  transmitter.  Since  both  units  are  con- 
nected to  the  same  shaft,  it  follows  that  the  speed  of  the 
pair  will  be  governed  by  the  synchronous  unit.  It  will  be 
understood,  of  course,  that  the  drive  motor  is  brought  close 
to  correct  speed  by  manual  control.  In  short,  the  scanning 
discs  at  transmitter  and  receiver  will  turn  in  unison. 

So  far,  one  important  consideration  has  been  neglected. 
Though  both  scanning  discs  may  be  turning  at  the  same 
rate  of  speed,  analogous  parts  of  the  two  may  not  be 
opposite  the  center  lines  of  the  respective  viewing  frames 
at  the  same  instant.  This  will  result  in  a  displacement  of  the 
image  from  the  center  of  the  screen,  not  unlike  the  effect 
sometimes  seen  in  the  motion  picture  theatre.  Supposing 
the  subject  to  be  a  human  being,  we  may  see  the  legs  at  the 
top  of  the  screen  separated  by  a  dark  band  from  the  head 
and  trunk  which  appear  at  the  bottom.  The  picture  has 
apparently  been  cut  in  two  and  the  parts  interchanged  in  the 
projector.  In  television  the  difficulty  can  be  corrected  by 
rotating  the  reception  unit,  casing  and  all,  without  changing 
the  drive  and  speed.  For  this  purpose,  a  ring  gear  operated 
from  a  hand  crank  is  attached  to  the  outside  of  the  motor 
casing.  (See  Fig.  56.) 

The  greater  the  periodicity  of  the  synchronizing  current, 
the  more  frequent  will  be  its  checking  action.  It  will  there- 


ioo  TELEVISION 

fore  be  advisable  to  use  as  high  a  frequency  as  circumstances 
will  permit  for  this  purpose.  In  the  demonstration  given 
by  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories  during  1927  a  frequency 
as  high  as  2125  cycles  was  used.  The  main  drive  current, 
on  the  other  hand,  may  be  either  a.c.  or  d.c.,  whichever 
is  most  convenient. 

The  foregoing  discussion  has  been  designed  to  give  the 
principles  of  the  more  common  methods  used  for  obtaining 
synchronization  both  in  telephotography  and  television.  The 
development  of  these  concepts  may  be  traced  in  the  descrip- 
tions of  the  various  present-day  systems  to  be  given  in  sub- 
sequent chapters. 


CHAPTER  XI 
TELEPHOTOGRAPHY 

TELEPHOTOGRAPHY,  using  the  word  in  its  broader  sense 
to  mean  the  transmission  of  photographs  either  by  wire  or 
by  radio,  has  now  reached  the  stage  of  commercialization. 
In  February,  1929,  a  number  of  American  newspapers  car- 
ried reproductions  of  portions  of  Einstein's  famous  five 
page  manuscript  which  had  been  sent  across  the  Atlantic  as 
radio  pictures.  Photographs  which  have  been  "wired"  over 
considerable  distances  are  frequently  seen  alongside  the 
news  report  of  the  event.  The  larger  telegraph  offices  are 
prepared  to  transmit  facsimilies  of  hand  writing  as  part  of 
their  daily  routine.  All  of  which  goes  to  show  that  photo 
transmission  has  arrived;  although  to  be  sure,  there  is  plenty 
of  room  for  improvements,  in  the  way  of  increased  speed, 
elimination  of  blurring  due  to  static,  and  so  forth. 

In  Chapter  II  an  outline  of  the  early  experiments  in 
telephotography  was  given.  For  a  more  detailed  description 
of  this  field  the  reader  is  referred  to  one  of  the  following 
books: — T.  Thorne  Baker,  "Wireless  Pictures  and  Tele- 
vision" ;  Korn,  "Handbuch  der  Phototelegraphie  und  Tel- 
autographie" ;  Work,  "Bildtelegraphie." 

In  the  preparation  of  this  book  the  authors  have  felt 
that  material  relating  to  picture  transmission  should  be  in- 
cluded only  in  so  far  as  the  main  subject,  television,  was 
clarified  thereby.  For  this  reason  only  a  few  of  the  more 
important  present-day  systems  used  in  America  are  discussed. 

In  Chapter  II,  it  was  pointed  out  that  photographs 
might  be  transmitted  directly  or  in  code.  Since  the  coding 

101 


IO2 


TELEVISION 


operation  requires  valuable  time,  we  find  that  most  com- 
mercial systems  are  direct.  Yet  it  will  be  evident  that  a 
code  message  is  less  apt  to  be  distorted  by  extraneous  dis- 
turbances than  one  in  which  the  variations  are  relatively 
small  and  continuous,  as  is  the  case  in  direct  transmission. 
For  example,  a  Morse-code  wireless  message  is  much  more 
likely  to  be  decipherable  through  bad  static  than  is  a  radio 
broadcast  program.  Hence  a  code  method  possesses  an 
advantage  where  the  picture  is  to  be  sent  over  a  very  con- 
siderable distance,  such  as  across  the  Atlantic.  In  this 
particular  instance,  there  is  another  reason  for  the  use  of 


ORIGINAL 


TAPE 


FIG.  57. — Appearance  of  original  and  tape  which  would  be  formed  for  various 
sections  thereof  in  Bartlane  process. 

code.  The  electrical  characteristics  of  long  cables  render 
them  unsuitable  for  the  transmission  of  modulated  currents 
such  as  are  produced  in  any  direct  photo-scanning  system. 
On  this  account  we  find  the  Bartlane  process,  which  employs 
an  extremely  rapid,  automatic  coding  of  the  photograph, 
quite  frequently  used  in  transoceanic  work.  This  ingenious 
scheme  is  due  to  Captain  M.  D.  McFarlane  and  H.  G. 
Bartholomew,  two  English  inventors. 

The  first  step  is  the  preparation  of  five  special  prints 


TELEPHOTOGRAPHY  103 

made  from  the  photographic  negative.  These  are  made  on 
sensitized  zinc  plates,  each  one  being  given  a  different  ex- 
posure so  that  each  contains  a  different  amount  of  detail. 
Suppose,  for  simplicity,  the  original  photograph  had  ap- 
peared like  Fig.  57,  in  which  six  shades  from  white  to 
black  have  been  represented.  Had  all  the  plates  been 
exposed  for  the  full  length  of  time,  they  would  all  appear 
like  the  original.  If,  however,  the  exposure  times  be  cut 
down  in  steps,  since  the  prints  are  made  by  passing  light 
through  the  photographic  negative,  we  may  arrange  them  so 
that  the  longest  exposure  will  be  effected  by  all  the  original 
but  part  one,  the  next  longest  by  all  but  parts  i  and  2,  and 
so  on;  the  fifth  plate  being  acted  on  only  in  the  portion 
corresponding  bottom  section  in  Fig.  57.  The  exposure 
to  light  renders  the  plate  coating  soluble.  So  that  after 
developing  and  washing,  the  zinc  plates  are  left  bare  at  those 
portions  effected  as  described  above;  but  are  covered  with 
the  sensitizing  coat,  which  is  a  good  insulator,  at  all  other 
places. 

The  next  step  is  to  mount  all  five  zinc  plates  on  a  metal 
cylinder,  geared  so  as  to  revolve  and  move  parallel  to  its 
axis.  Over  each  plate  is  placed  a  metal  stylus  which,  before 
the  operation  is  completed,  will  have  passed  in  a  close  spiral 
path,  over  all  points  of  its  particular  plate.  The  electrical 
circuit  for  each  stylus  is  reminiscent  of  many  earlier  designs 
mentioned  in  Chapter  II.  It  consists  in  a  battery  or  other 
source  of  e.m.f.,  an  electro-magnet  and  is  closed  through 
the  metal  cylinder  to  the  stylus,  provided  no  insulating 
material  intervenes  between  the  two.  Clearly,  then,  the 
circuit  is  closed  when  the  stylus  passes  over  a  portion  of  its 
respective  plate  which  has  been  acted  on  by  light.  Each 
electro-magnet  operates  an  arm  designed  to  perforate  a 
special  tape.  Each  line  across  this  tape  corresponds  to  one 
process  spot  on  the  photograph,  and  as  may  be  gleaned 
from  the  foregoing  may  contain,  anything  from  none  up  to 


IO4 


TELEVISION 


five  holes.  Figure  57  illustrates  the  relation  between  the 
tone  quality  of  the  original  and  the  appearance  of  the  tape. 
The  motor  feed  for  the  tape  must  of  course  be  timed  to 
agree  with  the  rotation  of  the  zinc  plate  cylinder.  Since 
each  spot  of  the  original  must  be  represented  by  a  sufficient 
length  of  tape  to  record  the  necessary  perforations,  it  fol- 
lows that  a  very  considerable  total  length  will  be  required. 
For  the  transmission  across  the  Atlantic  of  a  picture  of  the 
Hon.  James  J.  Walker,  Mayor  of  New  York,  275  feet  of 
tape  were  required. 

The  first  step  in  reception  employs  a  device  similar  to 
the  common   automatic   telegraph   receiver  to  perforate   a 


FIG.  58. — Schematic  diagram  of  reception  apparatus  as  used  in  the  Bartlane 

process.     Note  how  special  lens  concentrates  light  passing  through  an  entire 

line  of  perforations  onto  one  spot  of  negative. 

second  tape  in  exactly  the  same  way  as  the  original.  It  now 
becomes  necessary  to  reconvert  the  tape  message  into  a 
photograph.  Figure  58  shows  how  this  is  accomplished. 
The  keystone  of  the  system  is  the  special  lens  which  con- 
centrates onto  one  spot  of  a  photographic  film  whatever 
light  passes  through  a  given  line  of  tape  perforations.  If 
there  are  five  holes  in  one  line  the  exposure  of  the  film  for 
that  part  will  be  five  times  as  great  as  for  another  portion 
where  the  tape  contains  only  one  perforation.  The  receiving 
film  will  obviously  have  to  be  mounted  in  a  manner  analogous 
to  that  used  for  the  zinc  plates  in  transmission.  From  this 


TELEPHOTOGRAPHY 


105 


point  the  process  merely  requires  the  treatment  of  the  nega- 
tive as  in  the  usual  type  of  photography. 

Although  this  method  involves  coding,  the  apparatus  is 
so  cleverly  devised  that  a  remarkably  short  time  is  needed 
for  the  entire  operation.  When  a  photograph  of  the  sinking 
of  the  S.  S.  Antinoe  was  sent  from  London  to  New  York, 
thirty  minutes  were  required  for  the  preparation  of  the  trans- 
mitting tape,  some  five  minutes  for  cabling,  and  only  1 1/± 
minutes  for  the  reproduction  of  a  four  inch  by  five  inch 
negative  in  New  York.  To  be  sure,  the  print  was  somewhat 


FIG.  59.— Schematic  diagram  of  Ranger  system  of  picture  transmission  by 
radio.  Note  light  source  inside  cylinder  which  carries  photograph.  Photo- 
electric cell  output  is  amplified  by  special  "condenser  accumulator"  (seen  at 
upper  left),  then  applied  through  relay  (center)  to  radio  modulator  (right). 


lacking  in  detail  but  was  quite  satisfactory  for  newspaper 
work. 

Captain  R.  H.  Ranger,  of  the  Radio  Corporation  of 
America,  has  developed  a  system  of  picture  transmission 
which  is  now  in  commercial  service  over  long  distances.  The 
scheme  is  typical  of  the  direct  method,  requiring  no  coding 
or  special  preparation  of  the  negative.  This  negative  is 
clipped  firmly  in  place  on  the  outside  of  a  glass  cylinder. 
A  light  source  within  the  cylinder  is  sharply  focused  by  a 
lens  onto  one  spot  of  the  negative.  That  portion  of  the 
illumination  which  passes  through  the  negative  is  focused 
by  a  second  lens  onto  a  photoelectric  cell.  (See  Fig.  59.) 


io6 


TELEVISION 


The  cell  output  is  then  made  to  modulate  the  carrier  wave 
used  for  transmission. 

The  receiving  mechanism  of  the  Ranger  system  is  made 
to  reproduce  the  picture  in  duplicate.  One  record  is  made 
on  paper  by  an  inked  pen,  the  other,  on  a  photographic  film 
by  a  light  beam.  In  both  instances  the  material  on  which 


(Courtesy  of  Radio  Corporation  of  America.} 
FIG.  60. — R.  C.  A.  radio  picture  transmitter  of  recent  design. 

the  reproduction  is  made  must  be  placed  on  a  cylinder,  whose 
rotation  is  synchronized  with  that  at  the  sending  station. 
The  synchronization  is  accomplished  by  tuning  fork  control, 
a  detail  already  discussed  at  some  length  in  Chapter  X. 

The  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories  have  developed  an- 
other system  of  picture  transmission  over  telephone  lines, 


TELEPHOTOGRAPHY 


107 


which  is  in  commercial  service  today.  The  schematic  outline 
of  the  method  is  well  illustrated  in  Figs.  63  and  64. 
The  transmitter  (Fig.  63)  will  be  seen  to  differ  from 
the  Ranger  device  in  that  the  positions  of  light  source  and 
photoelectric  cell  are  reversed:  in  the  Bell  apparatus  the 
cell  is  inside  and  the  source  outside  the  cylinder  carrying 
the  photographic  negative.  In  the  receiver  (Fig.  64) 
the  amount  of  light  falling  on  the  sensitized  paper  or  film 


(Courtesy  of  Radio  Corporation  of  America.} 

FIG.   61. — Photo-radio  transmitter   and   receiver   as  demonstrated   by  R.   C.   A. 

recently. 

is  regulated  by  a  light  valve  controlled  by  the  received  signal. 
Tuning  forks  are  used  to  produce  synchronization. 

The  method  for  facsimile  picture  transmission  discussed 
by  V.  Zworykin  of  the  Westinghouse  Electric  and  Manu- 
facturing Company,  at  the  New  York  meeting  of  the  In- 
stitute of  Radio  Engineers,  January  2,  1929,  shows  the 
present  tendency  toward  simplification  of  the  apparatus  and 
greater  speed  of  reproduction.  To  quote,  "The  chief  object 
of  the  design  of  this  system  was  to  produce  a  simple,  rugged 


io8 


TELEVISION 


apparatus  for  practical  usage,  which  would  not  require  the 
attention  of  a  skilled  operator.  The  system  does  not  require 
a  special  preparation  of  the  original,  and  the  receiver 
records  the  copy  directly  on  the  photographic  paper.  .  .  . 


(Courtesy  of  Radio  Corporation  of  America.) 

FIG.  62. — Enlarged  reproductions  made  by  radio  picture  reception  apparatus  of 

R.  C.  A. 

In  spite  of  the  simplicity  of  operation,  it  is  capable  of  trans- 
mitting a  five  inch  by  eight  inch  picture,  either  in  black  and 
white  or  in  half-tone  in  forty-eight  seconds,  or  a  message 


TELEPHOTOGRAPHY 


109 


at   the    rate   of   630   words   per   minute — over   short  dis- 
tances." 

The  great  speed  attained  by  this  method  is  in  a  large 
measure  attributable  to  the  fact  that  the  original  needs  no 


( Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Laboratories.) 

FlG.  63. — Schematic  diagram  of  photo-transmitter  as  used  by  the  Bell 
Telephone  System. 


( Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Laboratories.) 

FIG.  64. — Schematic  diagram  of  photo-receiver  as  used  by  the  Bell  Telephone 

System. 

special  preparation  to  adapt  it  for  transmission.  The  pic- 
ture or  writing  to  be  handled  is  mounted  directly  on  the 
sending  cylinder.  Light  from  a  constant  source  is  concen- 
trated on  a  small  portion  of  this  original.  The  reflected 
illumination  is  collected  by  a  parabolic  mirror  and  thrown 


110 


TELEVISION 


against   the   window   of    a   photoelectric   cell.  Figure    65 

shows  the  optical  system  used.     The  scheme  suggests  the 
scanning  methods  used  in  television. 

Since  the  intensity  of  the  light  reflected  is  extremely 


(Courtesy  oj  the  Westinghouse  E.  &  M.  Co.,  and  of 
the  Institute  of  Radio  Engineers.} 

FIG.  65. — Optical  system  of  the  Westinghouse  facsimile  transmitter. 

small,  this  system  will  require  photoelectric  cells  of  great 
sensitivity  and  highly  efficient  amplification  of  their  output. 
The  cell  used  is  of  the  gas-filled  type,  the  light  sensitive 
coating  being  caesium  oxide;  the  gas,  argon.  The  ionization 


TO    MOOULftTOR 


OP    TRANSMITTER 

(Courtesy  of  the  Westinghouse  E.  &  M.  Co.,  and  of 
the  Institute  of  Radio  Engineers.) 

FlG.  66.— Photo-cell  amplifier  of  the  Westinghouse  facsimile  transmitter. 

of  the  argon,  when  photoelectrons  are  emitted,  greatly  in- 
creases the  output  of  the  cell.  Under  operating  conditions 
the  photo-cell  supplies  a  current  of  about  ^20  of  a  micro- 
ampere for  the  white  portion  of  the  picture.  This  must  be 


TELEPHOTOGRAPHY 


in 


greatly  magnified  before  transmission.  Figure  66  shows 
the  vacuum-tube  amplifier  used.  It  will  be  noted  that  two 
screen-grid  tubes  are  used,  the  third  being  the  usual  three- 
element  amplifier.  The  voltage  output  of  the  last  tube 
is  in  the  neighborhood  of  forty  volts,  sufficient  to  operate 
the  modulator  of  the  radio  transmitter.  The  circuit  must 
be  designed  so  as  to  be  free  from  any  tendency  to  oscillate 
or  otherwise  distort  the  photoelectric  currents. 

For  reception  of  the  signals,  a  standard  radio  set,  em- 
ploying one  stage  of  radio-frequency  amplification  with  a 


ROTARY  S*»TC*T 

ON    CYLINDER 
SHAFT 


M.  Co.,  and  of 
FIG.  67.  —  Glow-tube  control  circuit  of  the  Westinghouse  facsimile  receiver. 


(Courtesy  of  the  Westinghousc  E. 
the  Institute  of  Radio  Engineers.} 


screen-grid  tube,  a  detector,  and  two  stages  of  audio- 
frequency amplification,  is  used.  The  output  of  this  set  is 
utilized  as  shown  in  Fig.  67,  to  operate  a  neon  glow  tube. 
The  neon  tube  is  designed  to  expose  a  small  portion  of 
photographic  paper  placed  on  a  receiving  cylinder,  which 
must,  of  course,  rotate  in  unison  with  the  sending  device. 
Since  white  portions  of  the  original  cause  the  greatest  photo- 
cell currents,  it  follows  that  they  would  produce  maximum 
brightness  in  the  glow  tube;  hence  form  the  darkest  portions 
on  the  photographic  paper  of  the  receiver  —  i.e.,  the  re- 


112 


TELEVISION 


production  would  be  a  negative.  In  order  that  a  positive 
may  be  made  directly  the  process  must  be  reversed  either 
at  the  transmitter  or  receiver.  If  the  reversal  be  made  at 
the  transmitter,  bursts  of  static  would  get  the  same  inter- 
pretation as  dark  portions  of  the  original;  that  is,  would 
be  reproduced  as  black  spots.  This  is  undesirable  in  the 
transmission  of  material  for  the  most  part  white,  as  is  usually 
the  case.  For  this  reason  the  reversal  is  made  at  the  receiver. 
The  way  in  which  the  effect  is  produced  is  illustrated  in  Fig. 
67.  By  placing  the  correct  bias  on  the  grids  of  the  two  tubes 


SHUNT  FIELD  - 

(Courtesy  of  the  Westinghouse  E.  &  M.  Co.,  and  of 
the  Institute  of  Radio  Engineers.) 

FIG.  68. — Synchronizing  circuits  of  the  Westinghouse  facsimile  reproducer. 

whose  plate  circuits  are  in  parallel,  an  increase  of  signal 
from  the  receiving  set  will  produce  a  decrease  in  the  output 
of  the  tube  which  controls  the  glow  lamp.  In  other  words 
a  bright  part  of  the  original  will  be  recorded  by  a  dimming 
of  the  neon  bulb,  thus  leaving  the  photographic  paper  un- 
darkened. 

Dr.  Zworykin  employs  two  electrically  driven  tuning 
forks  for  synchronization.  These  are  mounted  in  constant 
temperature  boxes,  as  in  the  Ranger  system.  The  fork 


TELEPHOTOGRAPHY  113 

controls  the  speed  of  the  d.c.  motor  used  to  drive  the 
transmission  or  reception  cylinder  as  the  case  may  be.  The 
way  in  which  this  is  done  may  be  seen  from  Fig.  69.  The 


(Courtesy  of  the  Westinghouse  E.  &  M.  Co.  and  of  the  Institute  of  Radio 
Engineers. ) 

FIG.  69. — Westinghouse  facsimile  picture  transmitter. 

period  of  the  oscillations  in  a  vacuum-tube  circuit  is  fixed 
by  the  fork.  The  oscillations  are  then  amplified  and  im- 
pressed on  what  may  be  regarded  as  an  a.c.  synchronous 


1 14  TELEVISION 

motor  mounted  on  the  same  shaft  as  the  d.c.  drive.  The 
action  of  this  combination  has  already  been  mentioned  in  the 
chapter  on  synchronization.  In  order  to  keep  the  two  forks 
in  unison,  a  synchronizing  signal  is  sent  from  the  transmitter 
every  revolution  of  the  picture  cylinder.  This  is  sent  over 


(Courtesy  of  the  Westinghouse  Electric  and  Manufacturing  Co.} 
FIG.  70  a. — Westinghouse  facsimile  transmitter. 

the  same  wave-band  as  the  picture  signals,  but  the  record 
is  restricted  to  the  margin  to  avoid  confusion  of  the  two. 

In  order  to  insure  correct  framing  of  the  picture,  it  is 
necessary  to  make  certain  that  the  cylinders  not  only  rotate 


TELEPHOTOGRAPHY  1 1 5 

in  unison,  but  also  that  corresponding  parts  pass  under  the 
projection  and  reproduction  light  beam  at  the  same  time. 


(Courtesy  of  the  Westinghouse  Electric  and  Manufacturing  Co.) 
FIG.  70  b. — Westinghouse  facsimile  transmitter,  showing  photograph  to  be  sent. 

This  is  accomplished  by  a  stroboscopic  action.  The  picture 
is  held  on  the  transmitter  by  a  black  band  running  the  length 
of  the  cylinder.  At  the  starting  end  this  band  crosses  a 


n6  TELEVISION 

white   strip    which    runs    completely    around    the    cylinc 
While  the  projector  beam  is  exploring  this  portion,  the  gl< 


cylinder, 
low- 


(Courtesy  of  the  Westinghouse  Electric  and  Manufacturing  Co.) 

FIG.  71. — Westinghouse  facsimile  receiver.     Note  photographic  dark  bag  over 
cylinder  on  which  print  is  made. 

lamp  at  the  receiver  should  flash  once  each  revolution;  that 
is,  when  the  projector  beam  falls  on  the  dark  band.    At  the 


TELEPHOTOGRAPHY 


117 


receiver  an  interrupter  is  arranged  so  as  to  break  the  glow 
lamp  circuit  for  a  length  of  time  equivalent  to  the  trans- 
mission of  the  dark  band  once  every  revolution.  Conse- 
quently, should  the  two  actions  occur  at  the  same  time,  the 
glow-tube  would  not  flash.  Framing  consists  in  attaining 
this  condition  by  "a  process  equivalent  to  rotating  the  frame 
of  the  receiver  motor." 


Frame 


fitti  Han 
de  tends 


(Courtesy  of  the  Westinghouse  Electric  and  Manufacturing  Co.) 

FIG.  72. — Original  and  reproduction  as  received  by  the  Westinghouse  facsimile 

system. 

Figure  69  shows  a  plan  of  the  transmitter;  the  actual 
instrument  is  seen  in  Fig.  70.  The  receiver  is  illustrated 
in  Fig.  71.  It  will  be  seen  that  both  machines  possess  the 
advantage  of  compactness.  In  Fig.  72  "are  shown  side 
by  side  an  original  picture  and  the  facsimile  transmitted  over 
a  short  telephone  line  and  a  few  miles  of  radio  channel." 


CHAPTER  XII 
THE  BAIRD  TELEVISOR 

MR.  J.  L.  BAIRD,  who  has  for  many  years  been  identified 
with  the  development  of  television  apparatus,  is  generally 
credited  with  having  built  the  first  really  practical  television 
system.  This  he  demonstrated  before  the  Royal  Institution 
in  January,  1926.  The  device,  although  but  three  years 
old,  appears  crude  in  comparison  with  the  improved  systems 
of  the  present  day.  Its  crudeness,  however,  is  rather  in  the 
construction  than  in  the  principles  involved,  for  no  innova- 
tion of  any  consequence  has  been  made  since  his  original 
exhibit.  Others  have  followed  in  much  the  path  taken  by 
Mr.  Baird.  The  original  apparatus  is  now  to  be  seen  in 
the  South  Kensington  Science  Museum. 

The  scene  to  be  transmitted  is  strongly  illuminated  with 
a  number  of  incandescent  lamp  bulbs,  placed  in  banks.  In 
the  original  apparatus  this  illumination  was  the  source  of 
so  much  glare  and  heat  that  the  system  could  not  be  used 
to  transmit  pictures  of  people.  Since  then,  however,  im- 
proved more  sensitive  apparatus  has  made  this  possible. 

The  scene  is  placed  before  a  large  lens-disc  which  con- 
tains thirty-two  lenses  arranged  in  a  spiral  as  shown  in 
Fig.  73.  As  the  lens-disc  revolves  each  lens  in  turn 
scans  a  strip  of  the  scene  and  projects  the  light  it  receives 
from  the  scene  onto  a  photoelectric  cell.  Thus  the  first  lens, 
farthest  out  from  the  center  of  the  disc,  projects  light  from 
a  horizontal  strip  across  the  top  of  the  scene.  The  varia- 
tions in  the  illumination  from  the  scene  along  this  strip  are 
projected  in  rapid  succession  onto  the  cell.  When  the  first 

118 


THE  BAIRD  TELEVISOR 


119 


lens  has  passed  across  the  scene  the  next  one  has  just  reached 
it;  so  that  each  strip  is  scanned  in  turn.  As  the  disc  rotates 
at  a  speed  of  800  revolutions  per  minute  this  means  that 
the  entire  scene  is  scanned  800  times  per  minute  or  about 
thirteen  times  a  second.  The  picture  is  thus  completely 
reproduced  at  the  receiving  end  thirteen  times  per  second 
and  the  persistence  of  vision  of  the  human  eye  causes  us  to 
interprets  the  picture  as  continuous. 


FIG.  73. — Baird  lens  disc  showing  spiral  arrangement  by  means  of  which  the 

scene  is  scanned. 

Directly  behind  the  lens-disc  is  a  second  disc,  Fig.  74, 
which  revolves  at  a  thousand  revolutions  per  minute  and 
which  carries  sixty-four  radial  openings.  It  revolves  in  a 
direction  opposite  to  that  of  the  lens-disc.  The  radial  teeth 
in  this  disc  act  as  a  chopper  to  cut  up  the  continuous  light 
striking  the  photoelectric  cell  into  a  number  of  separate  im- 
pulses. The  purpose  of  this  is  for  better  amplification  of 
the  signals  in  the  vacuum-tube  amplifier.  If,  for  example, 


120 


TELEVISION 


a  strip  of  the  scene  being  scanned  was  of  uniform  brightness 
the  current  produced  by  the  light  in  the  photoelectric  cell 
would  be  direct  and  unvarying  if  this  radial  disc  were  not 
there.  This  would  mean  amplification  of  direct  current,  a 
notably  difficult  problem.  With  the  disc,  the  current  is 
started  and  stopped  at  a  rate  too  great  to  be  noted  by  the 
eye  at  the  receiving  end  and  such  as  to  make  amplification 
easy.  The  disc  also  gives  a  definite  frequency  to  the  tele- 


FIG.  74. — A  disc  of  radial  slots  is  placed  behind  the  lens  disc  and  revolves  in 
the  opposite  direction. 


vision  current  which  is  useful  in  filtering  it  from  the  syn- 
chronizing current  when  both  are  sent  on  the  same  carrier- 
wave. 

Behind  the  radial  disc  is  a  third  disc  carrying  a  spiral 
slot,  Fig.  75.  This  disc  revolves  at  a  low  rate  of  speed. 
If  the  outer  part  of  the  spiral  is  before  the  cell,  only  light 
from  the  bottom  part  of  the  strip  being  scanned  enters  the 


THE  BAIRD  TELEVISOR  121 

cell.  If  the  inner  part  of  the  spiral  is  before  the  cell  only 
the  lower  part  of  the  strip  sends  light  to  the  cell.  This 
spiral  acts  then,  to  multiply  the  number  of  strips  scanned 
and  is  the  equivalent  of  placing  many  more  lenses  in  the 
lens-disc.  The  arrangement  of  the  discs  and  photoelectric 
cell  is  shown  in  Fig.  76. 

When  the  varying  light  strikes  the  photoelectric  cell, 
currents  are  set  up  through  the  cell  which  are  proportional 


FIG.  75. — A  spiral  disc,  just  in  front  of  the  photoelectric  cell,  produces  "finer 

grained"  scanning. 

to  the  light  received  and  these  are  superimposed  upon  the 
carrier  wave  of  the  usual  radio  transmission  apparatus.  If 
the  picture  is  to  be  transmitted  over  wires,  the  amplified 
variations  in  current  of  the  cell  may  be  placed  directly  upon 
them. 

At  the  receiving  end  the  entering  signals  are  amplified 
in  the  usual  manner  and  if  the  energy  is  led  into  telephones 
or  a  loud  speaker  it  would  be  heard  as  sound.  If  the  output 


122 


TELEVISION 


is  connected  to  a  neon  glow-lamp,  as  is  done  in  the  Baird 
system,  the  brightness  of  this  lamp  will  vary  with  the  current 
passing  through  it,  as  the  lamp  is  current  operated.  From 
here  on,  the  system  is  the  reverse  of  that  at  the  receiving 
end,  the  disc  with  the  spiral  slot  and  the  lens-disc  being  used 
to  spread  the  light  out  on  a  ground  glass  viewing  screen  in 
the  same  manner  that  the  light  was  originally  collected.  As 


FIG.  76. — Scanning  arrangement  used  In  the  Baird  system. 

jjjfej 
there  is  no  longer  any  system  of  amplification  involved  the 

radial  disc  is  of  no  service  and  is  accordingly  omitted. 

Of  course,  it  will  be  obvious  that  the  beam  of  light 
reproducing  the  picture  must,  at  any  instant,  be  in  a  spot  cor- 
responding exactly  to  that  which  is  being  scanned  by  the 
sending  system.  They  must  not  only  start  at  the  same  place 
but  they  must  be  kept  in  step.  Keeping  them  in  pace  is 
accomplished  by  the  synchronizing  system.  On  the  shaft 


THE  BAIRD  TELEVISOR  123 

driving  the  sending  lens-disc  there  is,  besides  the  driving 
motor,  an  a.c.  generator.  The  a.c.  current  generated 
is  sent  out  by  the  usual  broadcasting  system  either  on  a 
separate  carrier-wave  from  that  used  in  the  television,  or 
on  the  same  wave,  later  to  be  filtered  out.  In  Baird's  original 
apparatus  two  sending  and  two  receiving  sets  were  used  for 
simplicity. 


(Courtesy  of  J.  L.  Baird.) 

FIG.  77. — British  scientists  at  the  Glasgow  meeting  of  the  British  Association 
inspecting  a  Baird  receiver,  September,  1928. 

The  a.c.  from  this  generator  is  supplied  after  trans- 
mission and  amplification  to  a  synchronous  motor.  This 
motor  is  placed  on  the  shaft  which  drives  the  receiving  lens- 
disc  but  does  not  itself  drive  the  disc.  A  driving  motor  is 
brought  as  nearly  as  possible  to  the  correct  speed  by  the 
usual  motor  controls  and  the  synchronous  motor  has  just 


1 24 


TELEVISION 


sufficient  power  to  bring  this  driving  motor  into  exact  step 
with  the  system. 

The  framing,  by  which  is  meant  centering  the  picture 
on  the  ground  glass  screen,  can  be  accomplished  by  manual 
operation  of  adjustments. 

It  will  be  seen  that  there  are  a  number  of  limitations 
to  the  system  as  described.  The  speed  of  scanning  is  limited 
by  the  speed  at  which  the  disc  can  be  rotated.  The  size 
of  the  picture  is  limited  by  the  light  which  the  glow-lamp 


( Courtesy  of  J.  L.  Baird.} 


FIG.  78.— In  the  first  successful  television  from  London  to  New  York  a  picture 

of  Mrs.   Howe,   at  the  left  of  the   picture,   was  sent.     This   shows   a  group 

assembled  around  the  transmitter. 

can  supply.  The  sending  signal  is  limited  both  by  the  sen- 
sitivity of  the  photoelectric  cell  and  by  the  strength  of  the 
illumination  of  the  scene.  Mr.  Baird,  has,  however,  sug- 
gested changes  which  overcome  these  difficulties,  to  some 
extent. 


THE  BAIRD  TELEVISOR 


125 


( Courtesy  of  J.  L.  Baird.) 

FIG.  79. — A  close-up  of  the  first  transmitter  used  in  trans-Atlantic  television 

tests. 


(Courtesy  of  J.  L.  Baird.) 

FIG.  80. — Television  receiver  in  operation  on  the  "Berengaria"  when  in 
mid-Atlantic. 


126  TELEVISION 

The  scanning  speed  may  be  greatly  increased  by  use  of 
a  series  of  oppositely  rotating  lens-discs,  each  of  which 
throws  an  image  onto  a  ground  glass  screen  from  which 
it  is  picked  up  by  the  succeeding  lens-disc.  This  system  is 
described  in  Chapter  IX. 

For  increasing  the  amount  of  light  falling  on  the  receiv- 
ing screen,  he  has  made  several  suggestions.  One  of  these 
involves  what  is,  in  a  sense,  the  placing  of  one  picture 
adjacent  to  another.  This  may  be  done,  without  using 
several  complete  systems,  by  putting  several  lens  spirals  in 
the  lens-disc,  and  a  corresponding  number  of  spirals  on  the 
radial  disc.  Each  spiral  has  a  different  number  of  radial 
teeth.  There  is  a  photoelectric  cell  for  each  spiral  and  the 
output  from  each  of  these  passes  through  a  primary  coil. 
All  primaries  are  coupled  to  the  same  secondary  coil.  At 
the  receiving  end,  the  output  from  the  different  cells  is 
filtered  out  by  their  corresponding  frequencies  set  up  by  the 
radial  teeth  of  the  radial-disc.  After  filtering,  the  current 
is  sent  to  the  proper  glow-lamp  and  light  therefrom  is 
projected  by  a  disc  similar  to  that  at  the  transmitting 
end.  Each  part  of  the  picture  is  projected  to  its  proper 
place. 

A  second  system  suggested  by  Baird  is  to  use  a  screen 
which  is  made  up  of  a  number  of  neon  lamps,  forming  a 
mosaic.  A  motor  revolving  synchronously  with  the  sending 
disc  carries  a  brush  which  passes  over  a  commutator,  thus 
connecting  one  after  the  other  of  these  lamps  into  the  cir- 
cuit. Each  row  of  lamps  corresponds  to  one  hole  in  the 
scanning-disc.  Thus  as  one  strip  is  scanned,  each  lamp  in 
the  row  corresponding  to  that  hole  will  be  lighted  and  the 
brightness  of  the  lamp  will  correspond  to  the  brightness 
coming  through  the  hole  at  the  corresponding  point  of  the 
scene.  If  enough  of  these  lamps  are  used  a  steady  picture 
will  appear  because  of  the  persistence  of  vision.  As  each 
lamp  must  have  two  wires  leading  to  it,  an  enormous  number 


THE  BAIRD  TELEVISOR  127 

of  wires  are  necessary  for  a  screen  of  any  size.     This  is  the 
chief  barrier  to  a  system  of  this  kind. 


FIG.  8 1. — Daylight  television  by  the  Baird  system. 


( Courtesy  of  J.  L.  Baird.} 
FIG.  83.— A  group  before  the  daylight  transmitter. 


128 


TELEVISION 


FIG.  83. — Party  of  American  and  English  journalists  inspecting  a  picture  being 
received  by  daylight  television.     Mr.  J.  L.  Baird  to  the  right  of  the  aparatus 

is  demonstrating. 


FIG.  84. — A  Baird  system  whereby  a  spot  of  light  is  projected  to  the  exact 
spot   of   the   scene    at   the   moment   being   scanned,   by   a   double   use   of   the 

scanning-disc. 


THE  BAIRD  TELEVISOR 


119 


FIG.  85. — A  part  of  the  color  television  apparatus  used  by  J.  L.  Baird. 


FIG.  86. — Mr.  Baird  demonstracting  the  first  color  television. 


130  TELEVISION 

Mr.  Baird  also  suggested  a  method  for  overcoming  the 
difficulty  due  to  the  brilliant  illumination  found  necessary 
in  his  first  apparatus.  He  used  a  light  so  placed  that  its 
rays  passed  through  a  lens  in  the  lens-disc  other  than  that 
which  was,  at  the  moment,  scanning  the  scene.  The  result- 
ing light  spot  struck  the  scene  at  the  point  then  under  the 
scanning-lens.  This  gave  a  beam  of  light  which  fell  upon 
the  exact  spot  being  scanned  at  the  moment.  As  this  light 
passed  rapidly  over  the  scene  it  appeared  to  the  eye  to  give 


( Courtesy  of  J.  L.  Baird.) 

FIG.  87. — A  phonovisor,  in  which  the  television  sounds  are  recorded  on  a 
cylinder,  as  in  a  phonograph,  later  to  be  re-created  into  a  picture  at  any  time 

desired. 

uniform  illumination  of  but  low  intensity,  whereas  to  the 
television  apparatus  it  gave,  at  any  instant,  a  very  intense 
spot  of  light  exactly  where  it  was  needed;  the  spot  at  that 
moment  being  scanned.  (Fig.  84.) 

In  another  suggestion  a  spiral  of  concave  mirrors  was 
placed  on  the  front  of  the  disc  and  the  light  was  then  on 
the  side  toward  the  scene.  A  spot  was  reflected  back  at  any 
instant  to  the  point  being  scanned. 


THE  BAIRD  TELEVISOR  131 

Mr.  Baird  in  addition  to  being  the  first  to  successfully 
demonstrate  television  in  a  practical  manner  was  also  the 
first  to  transmit  pictures  by  short  wave  radio  apparatus 
across  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  This  was  accomplished  on  Feb- 
ruary 9,  1928,  when  pictures  were  sent  from  London  and 


( Courtesy  of  J.  L.  Baird. ) 

FIG.  88. — A  recent  model  of  the  phonovisor  for  recording  pictures  by  means 

of  waves  on  a  cylinder.     No  picture  appears  on  the  cylinder,  but  when  the 

sound   which  it  produces,   used   as   a  phonograph   record,   are   changed   back 

into  electrical  impulses  the  usual  television  receiver  will  create  the  picture. 

successfully  received  on  the  American  side  at  Hartsdale, 
N.  Y.,  a  suburb  of  New  York  City.  He  deserves  much 
credit  for  his  pioneer  work  extending  over  years,  for  his 
successes,  and  for  his  many  fruitful  suggestions. 


CHAPTER  XIII 
THE  BELL  SYSTEM 

ON  April  7,  1927,  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories  gave 
a  most  elaborate  demonstration  of  television  both  by  wire 
and  by  radio.  The  program  presented  at  that  time  was 
made  possible  by  the  coordinated  research  and  development 
work  of  the  vast  staff  of  technicians  of  the  Bell  System.  In 
describing  the  demonstration,  let  us  use  the  words  of  Dr. 
Herbert  E.  Ives,  whose  able  guidance  was  in  no  small 
measure  responsible  for  the  success  attained  by  the  Bell 
Laboratories'  experiments  in  television. 

".  .  .  In  that  demonstration  television  was  shown  both 
by  radio  and  by  wire.  The  wire  demonstration  consisted 
in  the  transmission  of  images  from  Washington,  D.  C.,  to 
the  auditorium  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories  in  New 
York,  a  distance  of  over  250  miles  by  wire.  In  the  radio 
demonstration  images  were  transmitted  from  the  Bell 
Laboratories'  experimental  station  at  Whippany,  New 
Jersey,  to  New  York  City,  a  distance  of  22  miles.  Recep- 
tion was  by  two  forms  of  apparatus.  In  one,  a  small  image 
approximately  two  inches  by  two  and  one-half  inches  was 
produced,  suitable  for  viewing  by  a  single  person;  in  the 
other  a  large  image,  approximately  two  feet  by  two  and 
one-half  feet,  was  produced,  for  viewing  by  an  audience 
of  considerable  size  (Fig.  89).  The  smaller  form  of 
apparatus  was  primarily  intended  as  an  adjunct  to  the  tele- 
phone, and  by  its  means  individuals  in  New  York  were  en- 
abled to  see  their  friends  in  Washington  with  whom  they 
carried  on  conversations.  The  larger  form  of  receiving 

132 


THE  BELL  SYSTEM 


133 


apparatus  was  designed  to  serve  as  a  visual  adjunct  to  a 
public  address  system.  Images  of  speakers  in  Washington 
addressing  remarks  intended  for  an  entire  audience,  and  of 
singers  and  other  entertainers  at  Whippany,  were  seen  by 
its  use,  simultaneously  with  the  reproduction  of  their  voices 
by  loud  speaking  equipment."  * 

The  engineers  of  the   Bell  System  set  themselves  the 


IMAGE   BEING   RECEIVED  IN   NEW  YORK 
FROM   DISTANT   STATION    BY  AUDIENCE 


BELL  TELEPHONE   LABORATORIES 


b IMAGE    BEING   RECEIVED  IN   NEW  YORK 
"ROM   PIS 


STANT   STATION    BY  INDIVIDUAL  | 


(Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.} 

FIG.  89. — Picturegram  of  the  demonstration  of  television  given  April  7,  1927, 

by  the  Bell  system. 

primary  problem  of  transmitting  the  human  face  in  satis- 
factory detail,  as  it  was  felt  that  this  was  the  most  probable 
requirement  for  a  television  service  to  be  rendered  in  con- 
junction with  the  telephone.  A  consideration  of  the  half- 
tone engraving  process  led  to  the  conclusion  that  a  50  line 
screen  (i.e.,  2500  dots  per  square  inch)  would  give  sufficient 

1  From  a  paper  presented  at  the  Summer  Convention  of  the  A.  I.  E.  E., 
Detroit,   Michigan,  June  20-25,   1927. 


134  TELEVISION 

detail  for  this  purpose.  Fortunately  it  is  possible  to  transmit 
images  of  this  type  of  a  size  up  to  5  x  7  inches,  sixteen  per 
second,  as  is  necessary  in  television,  without  exceeding  the 
frequency  limits  of  a  single  communication  channel — either 
telephone  wire  or  radio  wave-band.  Accordingly,  this  was 
the  structure  of  reproduction  selected,  and  the  operations 
of  scanning,  transmission,  screening  and  synchronization 
were  adapted  thereto. 

The  arrangement  used  for  scanning  is  well  illustrated  in 
Fig.  90.  Light  from  a  source  of  high  intensity  (a  40 
ampere  Sperry  arc,  at  the  right  of  the  photograph)  is  con- 
centrated onto  a  small  portion  of  the  scanning  disc.  (The 
latter  may  be  clearly  seen,  together  with  its  synchronous 
motor  drive,  at  the  center  of  the  apparatus  table.)  This 
disc  contains  50  small  holes,  arranged  in  a  spiral  near  its 
periphery.  At  any  instant  the  illumination  will  strike  several 
of  these  apertures,  but  by  means  of  a  frame  placed  on  the 
side  of  the  disc  away  from  the  light  source,  the  beam  coming 
through  just  one  will  be  selected  and  focused  by  a  second 
lens  onto  the  subject  being  scanned.  As  the  disc  makes 
approximately  eighteen  revolutions  per  second,  the  subject 
is  completely  scanned  by  a  very  rapidly  moving  spot  of  light 
that  number  of  times  each  second.  Though  the  intensity  of 
illumination  is  high,  its  transitory  nature,  in  a  system  of  this 
type,  prevents  discomfort  to  the  person  being  scanned. 

The  next  step  in  the  process  is  to  pick  up  the  light  re- 
flected from  the  portion  of  the  subject  being  scanned  and 
convert  it  into  some  form  of  electrical  impulse.  For  this 
purpose  the  Bell  System  employs  three  large  photoelectric 
cells,  as  seen  arranged  in  an  inverted  U,  just  in  front 
of  the  subject.  Figures  91  and  92  give  an  idea  of 
the  size  and  structure  of  these  cells.  They  are  of  the  potas- 
sium-hydride, gas-filled  type.  The  three,  arranged  as  shown, 
present  an  aperture  of  120  square  inches  to  collect  the  light 
reflected  from  the  subject.  By  connecting  these  cells  in 


THE  BELL  SYSTEM 


13$ 


136 


TELEVISION 


parallel,  a  current  output  may  be  obtained  which  is  above 
the  noise  level  of  the  amplifier  system — that  is,  will  not  be 


(Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.) 

FIG.  91. — One  of  the  giant  photoelectric  cells,  which  served  as  the  eyes  of  the 
Bell  Laboratories'  tests. 


(Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.] 

FlG.  92. — Detail  of  a  photoelectric  cell  of  the  type  used  in  the  Bell  apparatus. 
Note  large  area  of  photo-sensitive  coating. 


THE  BELL  SYSTEM 


137 


confused  with  the  extraneous  circuit  noises  incident  to  the 
amplifying  circuits. 

That  the  problem  of  rendering  the  output  of  the  photo- 
cel  suitable  for  transmission  is  no  inconsiderable  one,  will 
be  recognized  from  the  fact  that  the  power  delivered  to  the 
transmission  medium  is  1,000,000,000,000,000  times  the 


(Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.] 


FIG.  93. — Complete  transmitter  as  developed  by  the  Bell  engineers.     Note 
separate  units  used  for  mounting  intermediate  amplifiers. 

power  received  from  the  photo-electric  cells.  The  amplifica- 
tion must  also  be  uniform  over  a  range  of  frequencies  from 
10  to  20,000  cycles  if  the  pictures  are  to  be  free  from  dis- 
tortion. In  the  system  employed  by  the  Bell  engineers,  ten 
stages  of  vacuum  tube  amplifiers  were  used  to  raise  the 
signal  to  a  point  where  it  would  successfully  override  inter- 


138 


TELEVISION 


ference  encountered  in  transmission.  The  first  two  stages 
are  included  in  the  frame  which  holds  the  photo-electric  cells ; 
the  remaining  eight  are  mounted  in  a  special  relay  rack  (see 
Fig.  93.  Owing  to  the  large  amplification  and  freedom 
from  distortion  which  is  essential,  transformer  coupling 
between  stages  was  considered  unfeasible  and  the  resistance 
capacitance  type  substituted  in  its  stead.  Figure  94  is 
a  schematic  diagram  of  the  first  two  stages  of  the  amplifier. 
It  should  be  recalled  that  the  photo-cell  output  is  an 
unidirectional  current  whose  magnitude  depends  on  the 
general  lighting  conditions  around  the  object  being  trans- 
mitted; on  this  the  fluctuations  due  to  the  light  and  shade 

a                   SHIELDED     AMPLIFIER 
H  , 

-HH1- 


x. — j 

(Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories^  Inc.] 

FlG.   94. — Schematic  diagram  of  the  first  two  stages  of  the  vacuum-tube 
amplifier  used  with  the  photoelectric  cells  in  the  Bell  equipment. 

of  the  various  portions  of  the  object  itself  are  superimposed. 
Now,  satisfactory  amplification  of  a  direct  current  presents 
very  considerable  difficulties.  So  much  so,  that  it  was  de- 
cided to  introduce  this  background  current  arbitrarily  at  the 
receiver,  making  no  attempt  to  transmit  it  either  by  wire 
or  radio.  The  results  obtained  by  this  system  were  quite 
satisfactory  and  the  amplifier  characteristics  could  be 
specifically  designed  to  handle  the  alternating  component  of 
the  cell  current. 


THE  BELL  SYSTEM  139 

In  the  determination  of  the  electrical  characteristics  of 
the  amplifier,  attention  was  given  to  the  possibility  of  cor- 
recting distortion  produced  in  scanning.  Since  the  scanning 
spot  has  finite  dimensions,  its  response  to  an  abrupt  change 
in  the  surface  being  viewed  will  be  less  sharply  defined  than 
the  original.  For  example,  take  a  surface  such  as  illustrated 
in  Fig.  95.  At  the  time  the  scanning  spot  crosses  the 
white  to  black  boundary  the  cell  output  should  drop  abruptly. 
As  a  matter  of  fact,  there  will  always  be  a  finite  area 
illuminated  by  the  light  spot  (e.g.,  dotted  circle)  ;  hence  the 
illumination  received  by  the  cell  will  depend  on  the  total 
amount  reflected  by  this  area.  Clearly,  then,  the  current 
in  the  photo-cell  circuit  is  related  to  the  average  coloration 
of  the  area  covered  by  the  light  spot;  so  that  in  the  case 


FIG.  95. — Circle  denotes  area  covered  by  scanning-spot. 

considered  no  sharp  drop  will  be  produced,  but  rather  a 
gradual  decline  as  the  proportion  of  dark  surface  under 
illumination  increases.  This  apparent  sluggishness  can  be 
greatly  reduced  by  sharp  definition  in  the  scanning  spot.  In 
fact  for  objects  of  soft  tonal  quality  such  as  the  human  face, 
little  difficulty  is  encountered  from  this  quarter.  For  more 
extreme  cases,  however,  such  as  black  and  white  designs, 
it  was  found  possible  to  obtain  markedly  improved  trans- 
mission by  suitable  design  of  the  electrical  circuits  used  in 
amplification.  An  explanation  of  the  method  used  would 
entail  a  somewhat  involved  discussion  of  electrical  circuits 
which  the  authors  have  felt  beyond  the  scope  of  this  book. 
The  interested  reader  is  referred  to  Section  II  of  a  paper 
entitled  "The  Production  and  Utilization  of  Television 
Signals"  by  Frank  Gray,  J.  W.  Horton,  and  R.  C.  Mattes, 


140  TELEVISION 

to  be  found  in  the  Bell  System  Technical  Journal,  for 
October,  1927. 

Considering  next  the  actual  transmission  of  the  television 
signals:  two  systems  were  used — wire  and  radio.  Wire 
facilities  capable  of  transmitting  a  wide  range  of  frequencies 
were  available  between  New  York  and  Washington.  The 
characteristics  of  these  channels  were  so  well  known  that  the 
problem  of  adapting  them  to  television  requirements  was 
solved  almost  entirely  in  the  laboratory.  When  the  final 
tests  were  made,  the  character  of  the  images  sent  from 
Washington  to  New  York  was  not  inferior  to  that  attained 
in  short  transmissions  in  the  laboratory.  For  the  April 
7th  demonstration  two  circuits  were  provided  for  picture 
transmission,  one  being  a  spare  for  use  in  case  of  trouble; 
a  third  circuit  was  used  for  transmitting  the  synchronizing 
signal,  which  will  be  discussed  later;  a  fourth  for  the  speech 
transmission;  and  a  fifth  for  operating  orders  and  so  forth. 

The  problem  of  radio  transmission  proved  more  trouble- 
some than  the  wire  case,  because  of  the  severe  crowding 
of  the  "air"  in  the  New  York  area.  The  difficulty  is  es- 
pecially pronounced  where  television  signals  are  to  be  sent,  on 
account  of  the  great  width  of  the  frequency  band  needed. 
Preliminary  tests  made  with  the  available  channels  led  to 
the  selection  of  a  1575  kilocycle  band  for  picture  transmis- 
sion, a  1450  kilocycle  band  for  speech  and  one  of  185  kilo- 
cycles for  synchronization.  Of  the  three,  as  would  be  ex- 
pected, the  picture  signals  gave  the  most  trouble  in  trans- 
mission. The  portion  of  the  station  at  Whippany  which 
contained  the  photo-electric  cell  circuits  was  completely 
copper-shielded  from  antennae  radiation;  this  was  con- 
sidered necessary  because  of  the  very  great  amplification 
used  in  those  circuits.  A  Western  Electric  5-B  Radio  Broad- 
casting Transmitter  was  modified  so  as  to  suit  the  special 
requirements  of  television,  under  which  conditions  it  gave 
approximately  a  one-half  kilowatt  output.  Tests  made  with 


THE  BELL  SYSTEM 


141 


I 


142 


TELEVISION 


THE  BELL  SYSTEM 


the  equipment  indicated  that  the  daytime  was  pre/erable  for 
transmission.  Fading  began  with  the  sunset  period  and  be- 
came more  pronounced  as  evening  advanced.  Coincident 
with  the  fading  of  the  desired  image,  an  appearance  of 
"ghosts"  was  noted.  These  were  readily  seen  to  be  similar 
to  the  principal  reproduction  but  incorrectly  framed.  The 


( Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.] 
FIG.  98. — Television  transmitting  apparatus  in  the  studio  at  Whippany. 

effect  was  attributed  to  reception  of  signals  which  had 
traveled  over  paths  of  different  length,  hence  had  required 
different  times  for  transit  and  were  consequently  out  of 
phase.  The  probability  was  that  the  main  image  was  pro- 
duced by  energy  coming  by  the  most  direct  route;  whereas 
the  "ghosts"  represented  energy  which  had  traveled  from 


1 44 


TELEVISION 


THE  BELL  SYSTEM 


the  transmitter  upward  to  the  Heaviside,  or  conductive  layer 
of  the  earth's  atmosphere,  whence  it  was  reflected  to  the 
receiver.  Calculation  of  the  interval  between  the  two  signals 
verified  this  conclusion,  giving  as  a  height  of  the  reflection 
surface  about  60  miles — a  value  close  to 
that  generally  stated  for  the  height  of  the 
Heaviside  layer. 

The  radio  reception  apparatus  con- 
sisted of  a  specially  designed  superhetero- 
dyne receiver  for  the  television  signals, 
one  of  standard  design  for  the  speech,  and 
a  third  receiver  for  the  synchronizing 
channel.  In  the  television  receiver  a  sys- 
tem of  triple  detection  was  employed  in 
order  to  pass  the  wide  frequency  band 
used,  without  too  great  a  loss  of  selectivity. 

The  received  television  signal,  after 
amplification  was  impressed  across  the 
electrodes  of  a  neon  discharge  tube.  The 
tube,  or  glow-lamps,  were  made  in  two 
very  different  forms;  one  for  small  pic- 
tures to  be  viewed  by  a  single  person  and 
one  for  large  projections,  large  enough  to 
be  seen  by  a  fair-sized  audience. 

Considering  the  apparatus  for  individ- 
ual screening  first,  Fig.  100  shows  the 
neon  tube,  and  Fig.  101  the  way  in  which 
it  is  mounted  for  viewing.  The  electrodes 
of  the  tube  are  two  metal  plates  placed 
about  one  millimeter  apart.  The  gas  pres- 
sure is  so  regulated  that  the  glow  discharge 
develops  on  the  outer  surface  of  the  nega- 
tive plate,  or  cathode.  The  luminous  sur- 
face of  this  plate  is  viewed  by  the  observer 
through  the  holes  of  a  disc  similar  to  the 


( Courtesy  Bell.  Tel. 
Lab.,  Inc.] 


FIG.  100. — Neon  re- 
ceiving lamp  used 
in  Bell  Laboratories' 
experiments.  The 
rectangular  cathode 
is  covered  by  a 
uniform  glow 
slightly  larger  than 
the  field  of  view  on 
a  television  disc. 


146  TELEVISION 

scanner  used  at  the  transmitting  station.  This  viewing  disc 
must  revolve  synchronously  with  the  scanning  disc;  so  that 
at  any  instant,  the  observer  is  viewing  a  portion  of  the 
luminous  plate  which  corresponds  in  position  to  that  part 
of  the  image  then  being  scanned.  Since  the  brightness  of 
the  glow  discharge  depends  on  the  current  passing  through 
the  tube  and  this,  in  turn,  depends  on  the  output  of  the 


(Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.] 

FlG.    101. — The   individual    receiving   equipment   as   used    in   the  Bell    system 

demonstration.      Note    mounting    of    neon    lamp    behind    scanning-disc    and 

synchronous  drive  motor. 

photoelectric  cell  at  the  sending  station,  the  observer  ac- 
tually gets  a  series  of  rapid  glimpses  of  a  surface  illuminated 
proportionally  to  the  corresponding  parts  of  the  object  being 
transmitted.  So  rapidly  does  the  motion  occur,  17.7  com- 
plete transitions  of  the  entire  viewing  screen  (i.e.,  the  dis- 
charge tube  cathode)  each  second,  that  the  eye  is  conscious 
of  no  discontinuity,  unless  it  be  a  slight  horizontal  line-tex- 
ture of  the  image.  This  may  be  corrected  by  allowing  the 


THE  BELL  SYSTEM  147 

paths  described  by  successive  holes,  as  they  pass  the  viewing 
frame,  to  overlap  slightly. 

Whereas  the  image  produced  by  the  apparatus  described 
in  the  last  paragraph  was  about  2  inches  by  2^2  inches  in 


( Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.) 

FIG.  102. — Complete  disc  receiver  apparatus  of  the  Bell  system.    The  observer 

looks  through  the   shielding  \vindow   at  a   picture   some  2l/z   inches   square. 

The  36-inch  scanning  disc  is  used. 

size,  another  system  was  used  that  gave  an  image  nearly 
12  times  that  size.  In  the  latter  case  the  large  neon  tube 
seen  in  Figs.  103,  104  and  105  was  used.  The  tube  is 
bent  back  and  forth,  so  as  to  give  fifty  parallel  sections. 
Each  section  contains  fifty  exterior  electrodes,  cemented  on 
the  back  side  of  the  tubing.  In  this  fashion  2500  picture 
elements  are  produced,  just  as  in  the  case  of  the  small  view- 
ing frame.  The  operation  of  the  large  grid  receiver  is  con- 


148  TELEVISION 

trolled  by  a  2500  wire  distributor  (Fig.  106)  which  plays 
the  same  part  as  the  viewing  disc  previously  discussed. 
Through  the  center  of  the  tube  runs  a  single  spiral  electrode 
(Fig.  104),  connected  permanently  to  one  output  terminal 
of  the  receiving  set.  Contact  is  made  through  the  revolving 


(Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.) 

FIG.  103. — This  large  grid,  formed  by  a  continuous  neon  tube  bent  back  and 

forth,  is  the  electro-optical  element  of  the  receiving  equipment  used  by  the  Bell 

Laboratories  for  large  audiences. 

arm  of  the  distributor  between  the  second  output  terminal 
of  the  receiver  and  the  successive  external  electrodes  of  the 
large  tube.  As  contact  is  made  to  a  given  external  electrode 
a  discharge  will  occur  between  it  and  the  central  electrode. 
Due  to  the  high  frequency  of  the  voltage  used  (500,000 


THE  BELL  SYSTEM  149 

kilocycles)  the  current  will  actually  flow,  by  a  capacity  effect, 
through  the  glass  and  luminescence  will  be  seen  on  the  inside 
of  the  tube.  It  will  be  seen  that  if  the  distributor  arm 
revolves  synchronously  with  the  scanning-disc  at  the  trans- 
mitter, we  may  build  up  the  enlarged  image  in  this  grid 
receiver  exactly  as  was  done  on  the  smaller  screen. 


( Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.] 

FIG.  104. — Detail  of  Bell  grid-receiver.     Note  continuous  spiral  electrode  run- 
ning through  center   and  external   electrode  elements  placed   at  intervals  on 

back  side  of  tube. 

In  the  transmission  of  the  television  signal  it  will  be 
recalled  that  the  direct  current  component  of  the  photo- 
electric output  was  not  utilized,  hence  it  becomes  necessary 
to  introduce  this  background  illumination  at  the  receiver. 
This  is  done  by  placing  a  suitable  bias  across  the  neon  tube 
so  as  to  produce  a  steady  state  of  current  therein,  on  which 
the  alternations  from  the  sending  station  are  superimposed. 


150 


TELEVISION 


With  the  large  grid  receiver,  it  was  found  that  when  a  con- 
siderable interval  elapsed  between  discharges  at  a  given  elec- 
trode, there  would  be  a  lag  between  the  application  of  the 
potential  and  the  appearance  of  illumination  at  that  point. 
To  correct  this  difficulty  pilot  electrodes  were  placed  at  the 
bends  of  the  neon  tube  thereby  irradiating  each  branch  and 


(Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.) 

FIG.  105. — Final  mounting  of  Bell  grid-receiver.     Note  framework  which 
covers  pilot  electrodes. 

keeping  it  in  what  might  be  called  a  sensitive  state.  These 
pilot  electrodes  were  hidden  from  the  audience  by  the  frame- 
work placed  around  the  receiver.  (Fig.  105.) 

Turning  now  to  the  method  used  for  synchronization, 
we  find  a  system  not  unlike  that  previously  described  as  due 
to  the  English  inventor,  Baird.  The  Bell  engineers  took 


THE  BELL  SYSTEM 


as  a  standard  for  synchronization  the  requirement  that  the 
sending  and  receiving  discs  should  be  not  more  than  one- 
half  of  the  width  of  a  picture  element  apart.  Since  there 
were  50  elements  in  the  entire  width  of  the  picture,  which 


( Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.] 

FIG.  106. — Distributor  whose  function  is  to  send  high  frequency  current  to 
each  of  the  2500  external  electrodes  of  the  Bell  grid-receiver  at  the  proper 

time. 

corresponds  to  the  separation  between  each  of  the  50  holes 
of  the  disc,  it  follows  that  the  requirement  set  meant  that 
the  two  discs  should  not  be  more  than  %  x  %0  x  %o  of  a 


TELEVISION 


revolution,  i.e.,  .072  degree  apart.  The  ordinary  two-pole 
synchronous  motor  will  not  approach  this  degree  of  preci- 
sion. But  increasing  the  number  of  poles  improves  the  speed 


"I'l'l'l'l'l'r— 


© 


( Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.) 
FIG.  107. — Circuits  used  for  neon  tube  control  by  Bell  engineers. 

characteristics  of  such  motors,  and  it  was  found  that  a 
machine  with  120  pairs  of  poles  could,  under  favorable  con- 
ditions, be  expected  to  satisfy  these  requirements. 


(Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.) 
FlG.  108. — Assembly  of  scanning-disc  motor  used  by  Bell  apparatus. 


The  speed  is  set  for  these  motors  by  the  necessity  of 
producing    17.7    complete    pictures    per    second,    as    noted 


THE  BELL  SYSTEM  153 

previously.  Each  picture  corresponds  to  one  revolution  of 
the  disc,  hence  the  motor  speed  must  be  17.7  r.p.s.  or  1062 
r.p.m.  For  120  pairs  of  poles  this  gives  a  frequency  of 
17.7  x  1 20  or  2124  cycles  per  second.  As  a  matter  of  fact 
the  machines  were  made  of  the  variable  reluctance  type, 
with  1 20  teeth  on  the  rotor  (see  Fig.  108)  in  which  case 
only  eight  coils  are  needed.  The  tendency  of  these  motors 


FIG.  109. — Mounting  of  scanning 


^--^y 

( Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.} 
ig  of  scanning-disc  drive  as  used  by  Bell  apparatus. 


to  "hunt"  (i.e.,  vary  their  speed  of  rotation)  was  checked 
by  a  series  condenser  placed  in  the  circuit  which  feeds  energy 
between  them. 

There  still  remains  the  question  of  the  framing  of  the 
picture,  which  implies  that  both  discs  be  in  the  same  relative 
position  at  the  same  time.  This  may  be  accomplished  by 


( Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.] 
FlG.  no. — Synchronizing  circuit  as  used  by  Bell  Laboratories  in  short  distance 


transmission  over  wires. 


FIG. 


.  ,       .  :.   .  ..    •       :   •  •   £83  >*» 

( Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.) 

in. — Large  scanning-disc  motor  used  in  completed  form  of  Bell 
apparatus. 

i54 


THE  BELL  SYSTEM 


155 


manual  rotation  of  the  entire  motor  (note  crank  seen  in 
Fig.  109).  However,  it  was  found  that  too  rapid  rotation 
of  this  control  would  throw  the  motor  out  of  step.  For  this 
reason  the  d.c.  drive  motors  were  fitted  with  a  pair  of  slip 
rings  tapped  to  opposite  commutator  bars,  so  that,  at  1062 
r.p.m.,  they  generated  a  17.7  cycle  current.  With  a  two- 
pole  machine  of  this  type  there  will  be  only  one  angular 


SPEECH   SIGNALS 
(50-5000~) 


TELEVISION  SIGNALS 
(I0-20000~) 


INPUT    TO    RADIO   TRANSMITTER 
/     10-20000-     \ 
V25000-35000~/ 

30 -SUPPLEMENTARY    CARRIER  (30000-v) 


20       25 


OUTPUT    OF    RADIO    TRANSMITTER 
/I540-I550KC\ 
1555-1595  KC 
\I600-I6IO   KC/i^    RADIO 
1545  CARRIER 


1605 
.1^ 


1540    1550     1555         1575        1595       1600  1610 
( Courtesy  of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc.} 

FIG.  112. — Diagrammatical  representation  of  frequency  conversions  in 
multiplex  radio  system. 

position  at  which  synchronization  will  occur.   For  a  schematic 
diagram  of  the  arrangement  see  Fig.   no. 

Where  the  synchronizing  signal  must  be  sent  over  a 
long  distance  either  by  wire  or  radio,  large  quantities  of 
energy  cannot  be  transferred  from  the  sending  generator  to 
the  receiving  motor.  In  this  case  the  energy  must  be  at- 
tenuated at  the  transmitter  and  amplified  before  use  at  the 


iS6 


TELEVISION 


receiver.     The  circuits  necessary  to  accomplish  this  energy 
transfer  may  be  found  in  a  paper  entitled  "Synchronization 


THE  BELL  SYSTEMS 


157 


of  Television,"  by  H.  Stoller  and  E.  R.  Morton,  published 
in  the  Bell  System  Technical  Journal,  October,  1927. 


158  TELEVISION 

In  the  summer  of  1928  the  engineers  of  the  Bell  Labora- 
tories announced  a  decided  advance  in  their  television  trans- 
mitter. Whereas,  the  earlier  apparatus  required  that  the 
object  be  illuminated  by  light  from  a  powerful  electric  arc, 
the  new  development  made  possible  the  transmission  of 
scenes  illuminated  only  by  daylight.  The  system  employs  a 
large  lens  which  forms  an  image  of  the  scene  and  it  is  this 
image  that  is  scanned  much  as  the  object  was  in  the  former 
system.  In  this  manner  moving  persons  and  objects  at  a 
considerable  distance  from  the  lens  could  be  successfully 
scanned. 

In  concluding  this  chapter  it  is  well  to  emphasize  the 
fact  that  the  methods  herein  described  represent  a  super 
refinement  of  television  now  possible  only  with  the  vast  tech- 
nical equipment  and  trained  staff  of  an  organization  like 
the  Bell  System.  In  the  words  of  Walter  S.  Gifford,  Presi- 
dent of  the  American  Telephone  and  Telegraph  Company, 
at  the  opening  of  the  demonstration,  April  7,  1927:  "The 
elaborateness  of  the  equipment  required  by  the  very  nature 
of  the  undertaking  precludes  any  present  possibility  of  tele- 
vison  being  available  in  homes  and  offices  generally." 


CHAPTER  XIV 
THE  JENKINS  SYSTEM 

THE  lone  experimenter  whose  lack  of  equipment  is  a 
constant  goad  to  his  ingenuity  and  whose  endeavor  is  en- 
tirely of  his  own  choosing,  has  played,  in  the  past,  no  incon- 
siderable part  in  the  development  of  new  fields  of  endeavor. 
Nor  is  the  research  laboratory  of  our  titanic  industrial  cor- 
poration ever  likely  to  entirely  replace  him.  The  inventive 
mind  is  sine  qua  non  a  free  lance;  only  with  difficulty  can 
it  be  caged  in  the  toils  of  a  large  organization.  Though  the 
superb  coordination  of  the  engineering  and  research  staffs 
of  the  Bell  Telephone  Laboratories  has  given  us  the  most 
elaborate  demonstration  of  television;  the  individual  efforts 
of  J.  L.  Baird  in  England  and  C.  F.  Jenkins  in  America 
have  come  much  closer  to  realizing  the  ideal  of  home  enter- 
tainment by  radiovision. 

C.  Francis  Jenkins  has  long  been  a  worker  in  the  field  of 
optics.  To  him  is  generally  accredited  the  invention  of  the 
motion  picture  machine.  He  is  also  the  holder  of  an  Elliot 
Cresson  gold  medal,  awarded  by  the  Franklin  Institute  of 
America  for  original  contributions  to  the  field  of  motion- 
picture  mechanics. 

As  early  as  1923,  he  was  able  to  give  an  official  demon- 
stration of  the  transmission  of  pictures  by  radio  over  a 
distance  of  about  seven  miles.  The  most  interesting  part 
of  the  apparatus  then  used  was  the  prismatic  ring,  a  device 
original  with  Mr.  Jenkins.  In  describing  it  he  says:  "the 
prismatic  ring  is  equivalent  to  a  glass  prism  which  changes 
the  angle  between  its  faces,  and  in  rotation  gives  to  a  beam 


i6o 


TELEVISION 


of  light  having  a  fixed  axis  on  one  side,  a  hinged  or  os- 
cillating axis  on  the  other."  The  device  can  be  visualized 
by  imagining  a  glass  wheel  with  its  edge  ground  to  the  form 
of  a  triangular  prism;  but  at  no  two  points  on  the  circum- 
ference of  the  wheel  would  the  angle  between  the  faces  of 
the  prism  be  the  same.  For  half  a  revolution,  the  base  of 
the  prism  is  toward  the  center  of  the  wheel  and  for  half  a 
revolution  it  is  toward  the  periphery :  the  angle  between  the 
faces  varies  continually. 

The  result  of  this  construction  is  that  a  beam  of  light 
traveling  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  disc  and  focused  at  a 
point  near  the  periphery  will  be  refracted  a  varying  amount 

as  the  wheel  is  rotated. 
Assuming  the  wrheel  to 
be  spinning  about  a  hori- 
zontal axis,  the  light 
beam,  after  passing 
through  the  top  of  the 
prismatic  disc,  will  move 
up  and  down  in  a  vertical 
FIG.  n5.— Mounting  of  Jenkins'  prismatic  plane  perpendicular  to 

the    face    of    the   wheel. 

Now  if  the  light  beam  should  pass  through  the  side  of  a 
similar  disc,  it  would  be  made  to  move  back  and  forth  in  a 
horizontal  plane,  also  perpendicular  to  the  face  of  the  wheel. 
By  the  combination  of  these  two  actions  with  two  discs 
mounted  as  shown  in  Fig.  115,  an  object  may  be  scanned 
completely  by  the  emergent  light  beam.  In  practice  the 
horizontal  displacing  disc  rotates  one  hundred  times  as  fast 
as  the  one  which  gives  the  vertical  displacement;  hence  the 
object  surface  would  be  covered  in  one  hundred  horizontal 
strips. 

More  recently,  the  name  of  C.  F.  Jenkins  has  been 
associated  with  a  very  definite  attempt  to  bring  radio  movies 
into  the  home.  It  must  be  understood  that  this  is  not  yet 


THE  JENKINS  SYSTEM 


161 


true  television,  for  only  silhouettes  from  a  motion  picture 
reel  can  be  received.  However,  the  advance  represented  by 
the  simplification  of  the  receiving  apparatus  so  that  an  equip- 
ment suitable  for  viewing  by  a  group  of  five  or  six  people 
is  as  compact  as  the  average  radio  set,  and  costs  but  little 
more,  is  certainly  worth  of  mention. 

The  device  by  which  this  is  made  possible  is  another 
ingenious  optical  piece  original  with  Mr.  Jenkins — the  drum- 
scanner.  The  great  merit  of  the  construction  used  in  this 
drum  is  that  it  makes  possible  a  picture  of  good  intensity 
with  low  current  input  to  the  glow-lamp.  In  scanning 
through  a  disc  the  area  of  the  cathode  of  the  neon  lamp 


( Courtesy  of  Jenkins  Laboratories.) 
FIG.  116. — Jenkins'  drum-scanner.    Note  quartz  spokes. 

must  be  a  little  larger  than  the  total  size  of  the  picture 
reproduced  and  the  entire  plate  must  be  illuminated;  al- 
though at  any  instant,  only  a  very  small  portion  is  being 
viewed.  Whereas  in  the  drum  method  used  by  Jenkins,  the 
cathode  of  the  tube  is,  in  effect,  divided  into  four  parts  and 
only  that  part  being  viewed  is  illuminated.  Furthermore, 
the  light  from  the  lamp  cathode  is  concentrated  onto  the 
viewing  aperture  by  a  quartz  rod.  By  the  combination  of 
small  plate  area  and  effective  use  of  illumination,  it  is  claimed 
that  a  picture  of  sufficient  size  to  be  seen  across  a  room 
can  be  produced  with  as  low  as  5  milliamperes  input  to  the 


\6i  TELEVISION 

glow  lamps;  as  compared  to  some  50  milliamperes  required 
for  a  2l/2  inch  square  picture  formed  with  a  disc-scanner. 

Another  decided  advantage  of  the  drum-scanner  is  its 
compactness.  Where  a  disc  is  used  for  scanning,  the 
minimum  separation  of  the  apertures  determines  the  width 
of  the  picture  and  the  offset  of  the  ends  of  the  spiral  fixes 
the  height.  If  we  employ  a  48-line  image  and  make  suitable 
allowance  for  framing  and  size  of  the  apertures  (Vk  inch), 
we  find  that  a  disc  of  36-inch  diameter  is  necessary  even  to 
produce  a  picture  2  inches  square.  Where  a  drum  is  used, 
the  aperture  spiral  may  be  divided  into  a  number  of  parts 
spaced  along  the  axis  of  the  drum,  so  that  the  number  of 
holes  per  revolution  is  decreased  and  the  periphery  need  not 
be  so  large.  We  may  say  that  the  four-turn  drum  used 
by  Jenkins  in  his  radio-movies  receiver  need  only  be  one- 
quarter  the  diameter  of  a  disc  which  would  produce  the 
same  size  image.  And  here  we  have  neglected  the  magnifica- 
tion made  possible  by  the  intensification  of  the  image  in  the 
Jenkins'  drum.  Nor  is  there  any  fundamental  objection  to 
increasing  the  number  of  parts  into  which  the  aperture  spiral 
is  separated. 

A  detailed  description  of  the  drum  as  used  in  the  radio- 
movies  receiver  will  probably  serve  to  clarify  the  preceding 
discussion.  The  drum  is  a  hollow  cylinder  about  7  inches 
in  diameter  and  3  inches  long.  On  its  surface  are  punched 
48  holes  about  %4  inches  in  diameter  and  arranged  as  if 
on  a  screw  thread  which  makes  four  complete  turns  in  2 
inches  along  the  cylinder  (i.e.,  has  a  pitch  of  y2  inch).  A 
quartz  spoke  connects  each  one  of  these  elemental  picture 
areas  with  the  hub  of  the  drum.  This  hub  connects,  at  one 
end,  with  the  motor  drive  shaft,  but  for  the  length  of  the 
drum  is  hollow  and  about  i  y2  inches  in  diameter.  Inside 
the  drum-hub,  but  not  attached  thereto,  a  glow-lamp  is 
mounted.  The  lamp  is  of  special  design,  having  four 
cathode  plates  about  %G  by  %  inch  in  size,  one  under  each 


THE  JENKINS  SYSTEM 


163 


turn  of  the  quartz  rods;  but  only  one  anode,  running  the 
entire  length  of  the  under  side  of  the  tube. 


(Courtesy  of  Jenkins  Laboratories.) 
FIG.  117. — Mounting  of  Jenkins'  drum-scanner. 


(Courtesy  of  Jenkins  Laboratories.) 

FIG.  118. — Jenkins'  radio-movies  receiver.     Note  magnifying  lens  and  mirror 
on  top.    The  drum  and  its  drive  are  inside  the  box. 


With  such  a  device  the  picture  is  built  up,  one-quarter 
for  each  complete  revolution  of  the  drum.    The  drum  shaft 


164  TELEVISION 

is  equipped  with  a  commutator  so  that  the  negative  input 
from  the  radio  amplifier  is  connected  to  each  of  the  four 
cathode  plates  of  the  neon  tube  in  turn.  The  connection 
remains  on  a  given  plate  during  that  revolution  of  the  drum 
in  which  the  picture  is  being  constructed  by  the  turn  of  the 
quartz  rods  over  that  particular  plate.  By  the  reduction 
of  the  glow  area  in  this  fashion,  considerable  brightness 
may  be  produced  by  a  small  current.  This  illumination  is 
most  effectively  utilized  by  employing  a  quartz  path  for  the 
light  from  the  tube  to  the  scanning  aperture.  In  this  case 


(Courtesy  of  Jenkins  Laboratories.) 
FlG.  119. — Complete  radio  and  radio-movies  equipment.  Note  comparative  size. 

the  internal  reflection  at  the  walls  of  the  quartz  tube  tends 
to  reinforce  the  light  within  the  tube  cross-section. 

The  drum  described  gives  a  picture  two  inches  square. 
It  will  be  noted  from  the  accompanying  photographs,  how- 
ever, that  the  picture  is  viewed  through  a  magnifying  glass. 
The  resulting  image  appears  about  6  inches  square.  The 
entire  outfit  is  very  compactly  arranged;  the  motor  with  its 
controls  and  the  drum  being  in  a  neat  box  on  which  is 
mounted  the  viewing  lens.  Since  the  drum  shaft  is  hori- 
zontal, a  mirror  inclined  at  45°  is  used  to  change  the  light 
from  a  vertical  to  a  horizontal  path. 


THE  JENKINS  SYSTEM  165 

For  synchronization  the  Jenkins'  "radiovisor"  set  relies 
on  the  standard  60  cycle  alternating  current  supplied  by 
the  power  lines.  He  claims  to  have  had  no  difficulty  with 
synchronous  motor  drives  of  this  type  even  when  trans- 
mitting from  Washington  to  New  York. 


CHAPTER  XV 
ALEXANDERSON  SYSTEM 

THE  Alexanderson  system  of  television  has  its  chief 
value  in  the  receiving  and  projecting  equipment  rather  than 
in  the  transmitter.  In  fact  a  transmitter  of  the  type  to  be 
suggested  has  a  number  of  distinct  disadvantages.  For  this 
reason  let  us  examine  the  projector  in  detail  and  leave  the 
remaining  part  of  the  equipment  for  brief  discussion  at  the 
end  of  the  chapter. 

The  projector  consists  of  a  drum  on  the  periphery  of 
which  is  mounted  a  number  of  mirrors.  In  Alexanderson's 
first  apparatus  there  were  twenty-four  of  these,  each  one 
being  eight  by  four  inches  in  size.  They  are  mounted  on 
the  rim  so  that  they  are  normal  to  a  radial  line  of  the  drum. 
In  other  words  their  position  corresponds  to  the  tread  of 
an  automobile  tire.  Each  mirror  is  set  at  a  slight  angle  to 
its  neighbor.  Thus  if  a  reflected  ray  from  the  first  of  these 
mirrors  falls  upon  one  side  of  a  large  viewing  screen  the 
same  ray  reflected  from  the  last  one  will  fall  on  the  opposite 
side  of  the  screen.  The  intermediate  mirrors  will  cast  the 
ray  to  intermediate  positions  and  thus  the  entire  screen  is 
covered  as  the  wheel  revolves.  Each  mirror  sweeps  the  ray 
from  top  to  bottom  of  the  screen  as  it  passes  the  incident 
beam.  These  rays  are  referred  to  in  Alexanderson's  original 
paper  as  the  "paint  brushes"  which  paint  the  picture  on  the 
screen.  As  this  is  done  over  and  over  again  with  sufficient 
speed  to  take  advantage  of  the  persistence  of  vision  the 
scene  painted  appears  to  be  continuous. 

The  advantage  of  this  system  of  projection  over  others 

166 


ALEXANDERSON  SYSTEM  167 

is  that  without  any  complication  it  can  be  used  with  a  mul- 
tiple spot.  Alexanderson  used,  in  fact,  seven  light  spots. 
The  multiplicity  of  spots  has  several  advantages.  Perhaps 
it  is  best  to  describe  these  in  his  own  words  as  given  before 
the  St.  Louis  section  of  the  American  Institute  of  Electrical 
Engineers,  December  15,  1927. 

"When  the  drum  revolves,  the  spot  of  light  passes  across 


(Courtesy  General  Electric  Co.) 
FIG.  120. — The  Alexander  projection  drum. 

the  screen.  Then  as  a  new  mirror  which  is  set  at  slightly 
different  angle  comes  into  line,  the  light  spot  passes  over 
the  screen  again  on  a  track  adjacent  to  the  first  and  so  on 
until  the  whole  screen  is  covered.  If  we  expect  to  paint  a 
light  picture  of  fair  quality,  the  least  that  we  can  be  satisfied 
with  is  ten  thousand  separate  strokes  of  the  brush.  This 
may  mean  that  the  spot  of  light  should  pass  over  the  screen 


168  TELEVISION 

in  one  hundred  parallel  paths  and  that  it  should  be  capable 
of  making  one  hundred  separate  impressions  of  light  and 
darkness  in  each  path.  If  we  now  repeat  this  process  of 
painting  the  picture  over  and  over  again  sixteen  times  in  a 
second  it  means  that  we  require  160,000  independent  strokes 
of  the  brush  of  light  in  one  second.  To  work  at  such  a 
speed  seems  at  first  inconceivable;  moreover,  a  good  picture 
requires  really  a  scanning  process  with  more  than  100  lines. 
This  brings  the  speed  requirements  up  to  something  like 
300,000  picture  units  per  second. 

"Besides  having  the  theoretical  possibility  of  employing 
waves  capable  of  high  speed  of  signalling,  we  must  have  a 
light  of  such  brilliancy  that  it  will  illuminate  the  screen 
effectively,  although  it  stays  in  one  spot  only  one-three 
hundred  thousandths  of  a  second.  This  was  one  of  the 
serious  difficulties  because  even  if  we  take  the  most  brilliant 
arc  light  we  know  of,  and  no  matter  how  we  design  the 
optical  system,  we  cannot  figure  out  sufficient  brilliancy  to 
illuminate  a  large  screen  with  a  single  spot  of  light.  The 
model  television  projector  was  built  in  order  to  study  this 
problem  and  to  demonstrate  the  practicability  of  a  new  sys- 
tem which  promises  to  give  a  solution  to  this  difficulty. 

"The  result  of  this  study  is  briefly  that,  if  we  employ 
seven  spots  of  light  instead  of  one,  we  will  get  49  times  as 
much  useful  illumination.  Offhand,  it  is  not  so  easy  to  see 
why  we  gain  in  light  by  the  square  of  the  number  of  light 
spots  used,  but  this  can  be  explained  with  reference  to  the 
model.  The  drum  has  twenty-four  mirrors  and,  in  one 
revolution  of  the  drum  one  light  spot  passes  over  the  screen 
twenty-four  times;  and  when  we  use  seven  sources  of  light 
and  seven  light  spots  we  have  a  total  of  170  light  spot 
passages  over  the  screen  during  one  revolution  of  the  drum. 

"The  gain  in  using  seven  beams  of  light  in  multiple  is 
twofold.  In  the  first  place  we  get  the  direct  increase  of 
illumination  of  7  to  I  but  we  have  the  further  advantage 


ALEXANDERSON  SYSTEM 


169 


that  the  speed  at  which  each  light  beam  must  travel  on  the 
screen  has  been  reduced  at  a  rate  of  7  to  i,  because  each 
light  spot  has  only  24  tracks  to  cover  instead  of  170.  While 
the  light  itself  may  travel  at  any  conceivable  speed  there 
are  limitations  of  the  speed  at  which  we  can  operate  a 
mirror  drum  or  any  other  optical  device  and  the  drum  with 
24  mirrors  has  already  been  designed  for  the  maximum 
permissible  speed.  A  higher  rate  of  the  light  spot  can 


(Courtesy  General  Electric  Co.) 
FIG.  121. — A  broadcast  studio  sending  a  drama  by  television  and  radio. 

therefore  be  attained  only  by  making  the  mirrors  correspond- 
ingly smaller  and  a  mirror  one-seventh  as  large  will  reflect 
only  one-seventh  as  much  light.  The  brilliancy  of  the  light 
spot  would  therefore  be  only  one-seventh  of  what  we  realize 
by  the  multiple  beam  system,  which  gives  seven  light  spots 
seven  times  as  bright  or  forty-nine  times  as  much  total  light. 
"There  is  another  advantage  in  the  use  of  the  multiple 
light  beam.  Each  light  beam  needs  to  move  only  one- 


170  TELEVISION 

seventh  as  fast  and  therefore  needs  to  give  only  43,000 
instead  of  300,000  independent  impressions  per  second.  A 
modulation  speed  of  43,000  per  second  is  high  with  our 
present  radio  practice  but  yet  within  reason,  being  only  ten 
times  as  high  as  we  use  in  broadcasting. 

"The  significance  of  the  use  of  multiple  light  beams  may 
be  explained  from  another  point  of  view. 

"It  is  easy  enough  to  design  a  television  system  with 
something  like  40,000  picture  units  per  second,  but  the 
images  so  obtained  are  so  crude  that  they  would  have  very 
little  practical  value.  Our  work  on  radio  photography  has 
shown  us  that  an  operating  speed  of  300,000  picture  units 
per  second  will  be  needed  to  give  pleasing  results  in  tele- 
vision. This  speeding  up  of  the  process  is  unfortunately  one 
of  those  cases  where  the  difficulties  increase  by  the  square 
of  the  speed.  At  the  root  of  this  difficulty  is  the  fact  that 
we  have  to  depend  upon  moving  mechanical  parts. 

"If  we  know  of  any  way  of  sweeping  a  ray  of  light  back 
and  forth  without  the  use  of  mechanical  motion,  the  answer 
might  be  different.  Perhaps  some  such  way  will  be  dis- 
covered, but  we  are  not  willing  to  wait  for  a  discovery  that 
may  never  come.  A  cathode  ray  can  be  deflected  by  purely 
electromagnetic  means,  and  the  use  of  the  cathode  ray 
oscillograph  for  televisions  has  been  suggested.  If,  how- 
ever, we  confine  our  attention  to  the  problem  as  first  stated 
of  projecting  a  picture  on  a  fair  sized  screen,  we  know  of 
no  way  except  by  the  use  of  mechanical  motion.  If  we  also 
insist  upon  a  good  image,  we  must  reduce  the  dimensions  so 
that  we  will  have  only  one-forty-ninth  as  much  light.  Our 
solution  to  this  difficulty  is,  not  to  attempt  to  speed  up  the 
mechanical  process,  but  to  paint  seven  crude  pictures  simul- 
taneously on  the  screen  and  interlace  them  optically  so  that 
the  combination  effect  is  that  of  a  good  picture. 

"Tests  have  been  made  with  this  model  television 
projector  to  demonstrate  the  method  of  scanning  the  screen 


ALEXANDERSON  SYSTEM 


TELEVISION 


with  seven  beams  of  light  working  in  parallel  simultaneously. 
The  seven  spots  of  light  may  be  seen  on  the  screen  as  a 
cluster.  When  the  drum  is  revolved,  these  light  spots  trace 
seven  lines  on  the  screen  simultaneously,  and  then  pass  over 
another  adjacent  track  of  seven  lines  until  the  whole  screen 
is  covered.  A  complete  television  system  requires  an  inde- 
pendent control  of  the  seven  light  spots.  For  this  purpose 


(Courtesy  General  Electric  Co.} 

FIG.  123. — In  directing  a  television  drama,  the  director  uses  a  receiver  to 
enable  him  to  see  the  effect  as  his  audience  will  see  it. 

seven  photoelectric  cells  are  located  in  a  cluster  at  the  trans- 
mitting machine  and  control  a  multiplex  radio  system  with 
seven  channels.  A  Hammond  multiplex  radio  system  may 
be  used  with  seven  intermediate  carrier  waves  which  are 
scrambled  and  sent  out  by  a  single  transmitter  and  then 
unscrambled  at  the  receiving  station  so  that  each  controls 
one  of  the  seven  light  beams. 


ALEXANDERSON  SYSTEM  173 

"Seven  television  carrier  waves  may  thus  be  spaced  100 
kilocycles  apart  and  a  complete  television  wave  band  should 
be  700  kilocycles  wide.  Such  a  radio  channel  might  occupy 
the  waves  between  20  and  21  meters.  If  such  use  of  this 
wave  band  will  enable  us  to  see  across  the  ocean,  I  think  all 
will  agree  that  this  space  in  the  ether  is  assigned  for  a  good 
and  worthy  purpose. 


(Courtesy  General  Electric  Co.) 
FlG.  124. — A  scanning  apparatus  as  used  in  Alexanderson's  later  experiments. 

"How  long  it  will  take  to  attain  this,  I  do  not  venture 
to  say.  Our  work  has,  however,  already  proven  that  the 
expectation  of  television  is  not  unreasonable  and  that  it  may 
be  accomplished  with  the  means  that  are  in  our  possession 
at  the  present  day." 

The  Alexanderson  drum  does  not  lend  itself  to  use  at 
the  transmitting  end  as  it  does  at  the  receiving  end.  Here 


TELEVISION 

the  method  would  be  to  project  an  image  of  the  scene  onto 
the  mirrors  by  means  of  a  lens.  It  would  require  that  the 
scene  be  illuminated  as  a  whole,  and  that  the  mirrors  be 
scanned  by  seven  apertures  which,  by  suitable  lens  systems, 
cast  the  rays  received  by  them  into  their  respective  photo- 
electric cells.  The  intensity  of  illumination  necessary  on  the 
scene  would  be  large,  an  objection  which  applied  to  the 
original  Baird  system.  It  is  possible  of  course  that  an  ex- 
ploring spot,  or  spots,  could  be  used,  provided  that  at  any 
instant  their  position  on  the  screen  corresponded  exactly  with 
those  being  explored  on  the  mirror  image.  This  would 
introduce  the  synchronization  problem  and  its  added  tech- 
nical difficulties.  One  synchronization  system  between  trans- 
mitter and  receiver  is  all  that  most  people  care  to  be  troubled 
with. 

On  the  other  hand  there  is  no  objection  to  the  use  of 
a  multiple  spiral  disc  such  as  that  suggested  by  Baird.  This, 
used  at  the  transmitting  end  in  conjunction  with  the  Alex- 
anderson  drum  at  the  receiving  end,  would  make  an  ad- 
mirable combination.  Since,  in  later  apparatus,  Alexander- 
son  used  a  spiral  disc  at  the  transmitting  end,  it  is  likely 
that  such  an  arrangement  will  constitute  the  essentials  of  any 
system  which  he  may  eventually  develop. 


CHAPTER  XVI 
RELAYS 

FREQUENTLY,  in  electrical  work,  there  is  available  only 
a  weak  current  from  the  primary  source;  and  yet  it  is  re- 
quired that  this  current  operate  apparatus  requiring  con- 
siderable power.  This  is  the  case  in  long-distance  trans- 
mission, or  in  radio  transmission,  where  the  conditions  are 
such  that  only  feeble  currents  reach  the  receiving  apparatus. 
In  such  cases  it  is  necessary  to  use  a  relay;  a  device,  which 
controlled  by  the  primary  current,  in  turn  controls  a 
secondary  current  capable  of  operating  the  machines  or  ap- 
paratus being  used. 

Relays  are  naturally  of  many  varieties  to  meet  the  great 
number  of  requirements  of  every-day  practice.  In  general, 
they  operate  by  passing  the  primary  current  through  coils 
of  an  electro-magnet  which  pulls  over  the  contact  to  com- 
plete the  secondary  current.  The  usual  telegraph  relay  is 
of  this  type.  The  principle  of  the  electro-magnet  is  too  well 
known  to  require  explanation. 

The  simple  telegraph  key  is  one  of  the  class  of  non- 
polarized instruments.  It  matters  not  what  direction  the 
primary  current  has;  the  secondary  contact  will  always  re- 
act in  the  same  way.  It  will  close  the  circuit  in  the  secondary 
when  a  current  flows  in  the  primary. 

For  many  purposes  this  is  not  sufficient,  and  so  polarized 
relays  have  been  developed.  These  are  made  to  close  one 
circuit  when  the  flow  of  current  is  in  one  direction  and  to 
close  another  when  the  current  reverses.  It  will  be  seen  that 
an  adaptation  of  the  usual  moving-coil  galvanometer  is 

175 


176  TELEVISION  ' 

capable  of  doing  this.  The  moving-coil  of  such  an  instru- 
ment hangs  between  a  pair  of  permanent  magnetic  poles. 
The  magnetic  polarity  of  the  coil  will  depend  upon  which 
direction  the  primary  current  flows  through  it.  (Fig.  125.) 
Its  face  will  turn  either  toward  the  north  or  south  mag- 
netic pole,  depending  upon  the  direction  of  the  primary  cur- 
rent. The  electrical  contact  for  the  completion  of  the 
secondary  current  may  be  made  by  a  pointer  attached  to 
the  moving  coil  being  carried  over  to  a  fixed  contact  on 
either  side  of  its  swing.  In  actual  practice,  however,  the 
torque  which  turns  the  coil  is  not  sufficient  to  hold  the  con- 

tacts firmly  together.  On  this  ac- 
count the  apparatus  is  frequently 
built  so  that  a  pointer  carried  by 
the  coil  moves  between  the  two 
pairs  of  jaws,  one  pair  on  either 
side.  These  jaws  open  and  close 
periodically  but  never  make  elec- 
FIG.  125.—  A  moving  coil  gal-  trical  contact  except  when  the 

vanometer  may  be  used  as  a  inter  attached  to  the  COll  IS 
polarized  relay.  A  pair  of  J  . 

jaws  on  either  side  of  its  swing  caught  between  the  jaws.    I  he  con- 


o  the  °ther  is 

tween  a  pair  then  the  circuit  then  made  through  the  material  of 
is  completed  on  that  side.        ^   po;nter       Th;s   offers   &    means 

of  periodically  adjusting  a  current  in  the  secondary  to 
a  change  in  direction  of  current  in  the  primary.  It  may 
also  be  arranged  so  that  the  pointer  is  normally  on 
one  side.  Thus  for  a  weak  current  it  will  remain  there, 
but  for  a  stronger  one,  depending  upon  the  torsional  value 
of  the  coil  suspension,  it  will  go  over  to  the  other  side.  This 
offers  a  means  of  controlling  secondary  currents  by  a  fluc- 
tuating value  of  the  primary  current.  Instruments  built 
upon  this  principle  and  carrying  a  recording  pen  are  used 
for  recording  temperature  changes,  light  changes,  etc. 

An  alternative  method  of  construction  is  to  use  a  per- 


RELAYS 


177 


manent  magnet,  or  a  bar  of  iron  magnetized  by  the  inductive 
effect  of  a  nearby  permanent  magnet,  as  the  moving  part. 
The  incoming  current  is  now  passed  through  the  magnetizing 
coils  of  the  fixed  electro-magnetic  pole  pieces.  As  a  change 
in  direction  of  current  changes  the  polarity  of  the  fixed  pole 
pieces  the  moving  magnet  may  be  attracted  to  the  one  side 
or  the  other,  depending  upon  the  direction  of  this  current. 
The  rod  supporting  the  permanent  magnet,  or  magnets,  also 
carries  a  contact  point  which  may  close  either  one  circuit 


FIG.  126. — In  this  type  of  polarized  relay  a  pair  of  vane-like  magnets  are 
fastened  to  a  stem.  These  are  magnetized  by  a  pair  of  large  magnets  not 
shown.  Change  in  direction  of  current  in  the  primary  cause  these  vanes  to 
turn  one  direction  or  the  other  and  contact  is  made  by  a  contact  point  shown 
at  the  top  of  the  figure. 

or  another,  depending  upon  the  direction  of  swing.     The 
arrangement  will  be  obvious  from  Fig.  126. 

While  it  is  customary  where  different  frequencies  are 
sent  over  the  same  circuit,  or  on  the  same  carrier  wave,  to 
separate  them  by  means  of  electrical  filters,  it  is  not  impos- 
sible to  do  this  directly  by  means  of  tuned  relays.  One  relay 
of  this  sort  which  has  been  suggested  has  a  number  of 
tuned  reeds  arranged  much  after  the  manner  of  an  har- 
monica. These  reeds  are  placed  next  to  an  electro-magnet 
operated  by  the  current  received  or  by  a  corresponding 


178 


TELEVISION 


amplified  current.  The  vibration  of  the  tuned  reed  causes 
the  current  to  vary  in  a  coil  an  amount  depending  upon  the 
extent  of  the  reed  vibration.  As  this  vibration  depends  upon 
resonance  with  the  received  variations  in  current,  the 
secondary  will  only  be  actuated  when  the  frequency  of  the 
reed  is  equal  to  or  nearly  equal  to  the  fre- 
quency of  the  received  signal. 

Perhaps  the  most  unusual  type  of  relay 
is  the  Knowles  device.  This  relay  has  an 
appearance  resembling  the  radio  vacuum- 
tube.  It  has  three  electrodes  arranged  as 
shown  in  Fig.  127.  A  rare  gas,  usually 
neon,  is  present  at  a  pressure  of  about  one 
centimeter  of  mercury.  When  a  voltage  is 
applied  across  terminals  P  and  TV,  a  positive 
space  charge  is  soon  built  up  around  the  P 
terminal  which  is  itself  positive.  This  space 


FIG.  127.— The 

Knowles  relay. 


charge  prevents  any  further  flow  of  current.  If,  however, 
the  hooked  terminal  G  is  grounded  or  made  negative  the 
space  charge  is  dissipated  and  current  is  allowed  to  flow. 
Such  a  tube  has  an  amplification  factor  of  about  a  million 
to  one.  It  may  be  readily  actuated  by  the  feeble  effect  of  a 
photoelectric  cell  and  in  this  respect  acts  as  a  very  positive 
control;  much  more  so  than  is  the  case  with  the  usual 
vacuum-tube  amplifying  arrangement. 


CHAPTER  XVII 
AMATEUR  EQUIPMENT 

ALTHOUGH  most  of  the  manufacturers  of  radio  parts 
are  prepared  to  supply  the  amateur  with  scanning  discs,  neon 
lamps  and  other  special  requisites  for  a  television  receiver, 
when  the  outfit  is  assembled  there  is  little  guarantee  of  any 
definite  entertainment  to  be  obtained  therefrom.  At  the 
time  of  writing,  there  is  a  discouraging  lack  of  uniformity 
in  the  spasmodic  attempts  which  are  being  made  by  the 
various  broadcasting  stations  to  transmit  television  pro- 
grams. Too  much  emphasis  can  hardly  be  placed  on  the 
fact  that  television  is  still  in  the  experimental  stages  of 
development. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  adventurer  who  gropes  his  way 
into  new  realms  is  certain  to  be  rewarded  with  thrills  never 
experienced  by  the  man  who  trods  only  well-beaten  paths. 
There  are  those  who  derived  keen  enjoyment,  some  ten 
years  ago,  in  adjusting  the  "cat's  whisker"  of  their  crystal 
detector  so  that,  with  almost  superhuman  auditory  acute- 
ness,  they  might  hear  a  phonograph  record  being  played  in 
a  broadcasting  station  some  ten  miles  away;  albeit  the  same 
record  lay  in  their  own  rack  not  ten  feet  distant.  To  such 
as  these,  television  now  offers  a  fruitful  field  of  endeavor. 
The  disappointments  are  apt  to  be  many;  but  the  explorer 
does  not  go  without  reward. 

From  the  point  of  view  of  the  development  of  the  art, 
there  is  nothing  more  beneficial  than  widespread  amateur 
interest.  Not  only  does  it  act  as  a  stimulus  to  organized 
commercial  progress  in  the  field,  but  often  leads  to  the  dis- 

179 


i8o  TELEVISION 

covery  of  new  ideas  and  new  talent.  Few  will  deny  that 
amateur  enthusiasm  over  radio  at  the  close  of  the  World 
War  contributed  more  than  anything  else  to  the  perfection  of 
the  present-day  broadcast  receiver.  Television,  today,  is 
sorely  in  need  of  just  such  a  boost. 

The  authors  feel  that  amateur  television  equipment  is 
at  present  in  such  a  state  of  flux  as  to  make  the  discussion 
of  any  particular  "hook-up"  inadvisable  in  this  book.  How- 
ever, the  interested  reader  will  find  no  difficulty  in  obtaining 
detailed  information  of  this  character  from  the  various 
manufacturers  of  radio  parts,  photoelectric  cells,  neon 
lamps  and  so  forth.  The  following  brief  discussion  con- 
siders the  problem  only  in  the  most  general  terms. 

Recent  action  of  the  Federal  Radio  Commission  indi- 
cates that  television  signals  are  likely  to  be  restricted  to 
the  short  wave-length  bands,  below  those  generally  used  in 
speech  and  music  broadcasting.  For  this  reason  the  tele- 
vision set  must  be  adapted  to  short  wave  reception.  There 
are  a  number  of  standard  kit  sets  of  this  type  on  the  market. 
The  use  of  a  222,  or  screen-grid  tube,  ahead  of  the  re- 
generative detector  has  the  advantage  of  increasing  the  sen- 
sitivity of  the  receiver  and  preventing  radiation  from  the 
set.  Aside  from  the  usual  electrical  shielding,  which  good 
practice  dictates  in  all  set  construction,  it  is  well  to  remember 
that  mechanical  vibration  from  the  scanning-disc  motor  must 
be  guarded  against  when  building  a  television  receiver.  For 
this  reason,  all  parts  should  be  securely  fastened  in  place 
and  the  set,  as  a  whole,  cushion  mounted. 

In  the  discussion  of  television  signals  given  in  the  chapter 
on  the  Bell  system,  it  was  pointed  out  that  to  produce  a 
good  half-tone  image  a  wide  frequency  range  was  necessary. 
This  means  that  transformer  coupled  amplification  can 
scarcely  be  used  without  introducing  distortion.  Only  re- 
cently have  transformers  been  developed  whose  reproduction 
was  faithful  over  the  normal  range  of  audible  frequencies 


AMATEUR  EQUIPMENT  181 

(16-5000  cycles).  For  the  "audio"  amplification  in  a  tele- 
vision set,  we  would  expect  uniform  results  over  a  range 
of  from  1 8  to  20,000  cycles.  To  be  sure,  a  recognizable 
picture  may  be  obtained  when  standard  transformer  coupling 
is  used,  and  for  initial  experiments  such  a  "hook  up"  may 
be  good  enough.  Where  the  best  results  are  desired  a 
resistance  coupled  amplifier  is  probably  much  to  be  pre- 
ferred. One  manufacturer  recommends  three  stages  of  this 
type  of  amplification  between  a  regenerative  detector  and 
the  neon  tube,  employing  a  240,  a  II2A  and  171 A  tube 
in  the  order  named  and  with  the  usual  B  and  C  potentials 
applied.  The  tube  characteristics  dictate  the  constants  of 
this  portion  of  the  circuit  as  in  any  other  radio  amplifier. 

The  exact  nature  of  the  neon  tube  circuit  will  depend 
on  the  nature  of  tube  used.  In  general  a  background  direct 
current  of  about  20  milliamperes  is  desirable.  To  produce 
this  current  a  permanent  voltage  must  be  supplied  across 
the  tube;  but  a  high  resistance  must  be  inserted  in  series 
with  the  tube  because  of  the  tendency  of  ionization,  which 
occurs  when  a  current  flows  through  the  gas,  to  decrease  the 
resistance  of  the  tube  itself.  This  series  resistance  should 
consist  in  a  high  permanent  portion,  for  safe-guarding  the 
lamp,  and  a  variable  portion,  for  controlling  the  current  to 
the  lowest  satisfactory  value. 

The  scanning-disc  and  its  motor  drive,  as  previously 
noted,  should  be  so  placed  that  vibrations  from  them  will 
not  be  introduced  into  the  tube  circuits.  These  synchronous 
vibrations  evince  themselves  as  horizontal  wavy  lines  ap- 
pearing across  the  picture.  To  avoid  this  trouble,  the  best 
policy  is  to  mount  the  disc  and  motor  drive  in  a  unit  entirely 
separate  from  the  receiver  and  amplifier  circuit.  The  motor 
will  probably  be  a  60  cycle  a.c.  type  of  about  %  horse 
power  rating,  fitted  with  a  rheostat  for  speed  control.  A 
good  method  to  employ  here  is  to  have  one  resistor  which 
may  be  varied  for  general  speed  control,  and  another,  of 


182  TELEVISION 

smaller  value,  which  may  be  shunted,  when  the  need  arises, 
with  a  push  button  held  in  the  operator's  hand.  Unfor- 
tunately, programs  requiring  24,  36  and  48  hole  discs  are 
all  "on  the  air,"  which  means  that  the  experimenter  will 
probably  wish  to  have  the  facilities  to  receive  them.  Either 
the  three  types  must  be  at  hand  so  that  a  change  can  be 
made  when  needed,  or  a  special  combination  scanner  must 
be  used.  The  latter,  as  produced  by  one  manufacturer, 


(Courtesy  of  the  Westing  house  EL  and  Mfg.  Co.) 

FIG.  128.— Dr.  Frank  Conrad,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer,  Westinghouse  Electric 
and  Manufacturing  Co.,  adjusting  his  television  motion  picture  equipment. 

merely  requires  a  shift  in  the  neon  lamp  position  in  order 
to  make  the  shift  from  one  to  the  other  class  of  program. 
In  the  discussion  of  scanning,  it  was  pointed  out  that  radial 
holes  lead  to  less  "lining"  of  the  image;  discs  of  this  kind 
are  available. 

The    successful    operation    of    a    television    receiver    is 
naturally  an  art  which  takes  some  time  to  acquire.     A  few 


AMATEUR  EQUIPMENT 


183 


pointers  may  prove  nelpful.     The  tuning  of  the  receiver  is 
not  very  different  from  a  similar  operation  in  the  usual  radio 


184  TELEVISION 

set.  The  signal  may  be  heard  by  attaching  a  loud-speaker 
(with  a  microfarad  condenser  in  series,  for  protection) 
across  the  input  terminals  of  the  neon  lamp  circuit.  "If 
you  are  getting  a  good  television  signal,  it  will  sound  very 
much  like  a  slowly  revolving  circular  saw  which  is  slightly 
off  center.  In  other  words,  you  hear  a  high  pitched  note 
which  might  correspond  to  the  tooth  frequency  and  this  is 
broken  up  into  groups  whose  frequency  corresponds  to  the 
rate  at  which  the  saw  (the  disc)  rotates."  a 

The  framing  of  the  image  is  an  operation  requiring 
some  skill  in  handling  the  motor  speed  control.  Where  the 
image  persists  in  appearing  inverted,  however,  the  lamp 
plate  is  obviously  being  scanned  from  bottom  to  top,  instead 
of  from  top  to  bottom.  The  fault  can  be  corrected  by  re- 
versing the  direction  of  rotation  of  the  disc,  or  by  turning 
it  so  that  the  side  formerly  toward  the  lamp  is  now  toward 
the  viewing  frame.  Where  the  image  appears  right  side 
up  but  transposed  horizontally  (that  is,  viewed  from  right 
to  left  instead  of  from  left  to  right)  the  correction  is  more 
troublesome.  The  direction  of  rotation  of  the  disc  and  also 
the  side  facing  the  lamp  must  be  changed.  Where  the  image 
obtained  is  a  negative  of  the  original,  reversal  of  the  input 
leads  to  the  neon  tube  will  correct  the  difficulty. 

The  Jenkins,  the  Westinghouse,  and  the  von  Mihaly 
systems  of  radio-movies  all  promise  good  "picking"  for  the 
amateur.  But,  to  date,  the  authors  have  insufficient  material 
at  hand  to  give  any  helpful  information,  other  than  what 
has  already  been  given  in  previous  chapters. 

1  Bulletin  TS-io,  Raytheon  Manufacturing  Company,  Cambridge,  Mass. 


CHAPTER  XVIII 
THE  FUTURE  OF  TELEVISION 

TEN  years  ago  one  of  the  authors  of  this  book  was 
extremely  skeptical  of  the  possible  success  of  television.  The 
speed  required  to  successfully  accomplish  television,  the  state 
of  photoelectric  cells,  the  lack  of  suitable  sources,  seemed 
insurmountable  difficulties.  He  is  now  writing  the  final 
chapter  to  the  first  American  book  on  television. 

With  this  in  mind  the  situation  is  a  difficult  one.  For- 
tunately his  ideas  of  ten  years  ago  are  not  in  print.  Ten 
years  from  now  the  situation  will  be  different.  Shall  we 
go  to  the  limit  in  our  predictions  and  line  up  with  the  "Jules 
Vernes"  of  the  day  or  even  with  those  wild  spectacular 
writers  who  out-Verne  Verne  in  some  of  our  present  daily 
publications?  Or  shall  we  line  up  with  the  rank  and  file 
of  humdrum,  unimaginative  engineers  who  still  almost  deny 
the  existence  of  even  the  steam  locomotive;  perhaps,  because 
of  the  fact  that  one  is  considered  a  good  scientist  by  scientists 
if  he  is  ultra  skeptical  of  future  developments? 

Undoubtedly  it  will  be  wise  to  steer  a  middle  course; 
or  better  yet,  to  predict  what  television  will  be  like  a  hun- 
dred, rather  than  ten  years  from  now.  In  that  case  the 
remarks  are  likely  to  be  forgotten  in  suitable  time.  Let  us, 
however,  discuss  the  attitude  taken  by  leading  men  of  the 
present  day. 

Mr.  M.  H.  Aylesworth,  President  of  the  National 
Broadcasting  Company,  tells  us  that  television  is  coming  in 
our  homes.  But  he  advises  that  this  should  not  stop  us 

185 


1 86  TELEVISION 

from  buying  a  present-day  radio  set.  We  shall  have  time 
to  buy  three  or  four  before  we  are  able  to  buy  a  combined 
radio  and  television  set. 

In  opening  the  demonstration  of  television  given  by  the 
Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  April  7,  1927,  Mr.  W.  S. 
Gifford,  President  of  the  American  Telephone  and  Tele- 
graph Company  remarked:  ".  .  .  The  elaborateness  of  the 
equipment  required  by  the  very  nature  of  the  undertaking 
precludes  any  present  possibility  of  television  being  available 
in  homes  and  offices  generally." 

The  advance  in  the  next  ten  years  cannot  help  but  be 
astounding.  The  invention  is  in  its  infancy  and  it  is  at  this 
stage  that  most  rapid  growth  takes  place.  Let  us  take  the 
case  of  the  modern  automobile;  let  us  assume  that  the 
progress  of  television  is  as  far  advanced.  Could  we  expect 
much  change  in  ten  years?  Dr.  Charles  F.  Kittering, 
Director  of  Research  for  the  General  Motors  Company, 
sums  this  up  in  an  article  in  Nation's  Business.  His  remarks 
are  as  follows : 

"A  few  weeks  back  I  was  sitting  with  a  group  of  execu- 
tives. All  were  admiring  a  new  model. 

'  'It  is  absolutely  the  best  automobile  that  can  be  made,' 
enthused  one.     I  objected  to  that  statement. 

"  'Let's  take  this  automobile  which  you  say,  is  the  "best 
that  can  be  made"  and  put  it  into  a  glass  showcase,'  I  said. 
'Let's  put  it  in  there — seal  it  so  no  person  can  possibly  touch 
it.  Just  before  we  seal  it  in  the  case  let  us  mark  the  price 
in  big  letters  inside  the  case. 

"  'Let  us  do  that  and  come  back  here  a  year  from  today. 
After  looking  at  it  and  appraising  it,  we  will  mark  a  price 
on  the  outside  of  the  glass.  It  will  be  a  price  something 
less  than  what  we  think  the  car  is  worth  today.  Probably 
$200  less.  Then,  let's  come  back  once  every  year  for  ten 
years,  look  through  the  glass,  and  mark  a  new  price.  At 
the  end  of  ten  years  we  won't  be  able  to  put  down  enough 


THE  FUTURE  OF  TELEVISION  187 

ciphers  to  indicate  what  we  think  of  the  car.     That  is,  of 
course,  eliminating  its  value  as  junk. 

"  'In  those  ten  years,  no  one  could  possibly  have  touched 
the  car.  There  could  be  no  lessened  value  through  handling. 
The  paint  would  be  just  as  good  as  new;  the  crank  case  just 
as  good;  the  rear  axle  just  as  good;  and  the  motor  just  as 
good  as  ever. 

'What,  then,  has  happened  to  this  car? 

'  'People's  minds  will  have  been  changed;  improvements 
will  have  come  in  other  cars;  new  styles  will  have  come. 
What  you  have  here  today,  a  car  that  you  call  "the  best 
that  can  be  made,"  will  then  be  useless.  So  it  isn't  the  best 
that  can  be  made.  It  may  be  the  best  you  have  made  and, 
if  that  is  what  you  meant,  I  have  no  quarrel  with  what 
you  said.'  ' 

If  this  is  true  of  the  automobile,  how  much  more  is  it 
true  of  television?  How  true  has  it  been  of  radio  in  the 
last  ten  years?  Less  than  ten  years  ago  I  tuned  in  my  first 
home-made  radio;  a  crystal,  a  few  coils  on  a  breakfast-food 
box,  and  some  telephones.  I  heard  WWJ  from  a  point 
about  forty  miles  from  Detroit.  It  was  remarkable!  A 
parade  of  neighbors  filled  the  house  each  evening.  A  face 
would  light  up  with  "Yes,  I  can  hear  it  now."  Today  we 
expect  an  almost  exact  reproduction  of  the  studio  rendition. 
I  was  astonished  when  it  was  announced  in  our  local  paper 
that  on  such  and  such  a  night  at  such  and  such  a  time  our 
electrical  goods  dealer  would  have  on  exhibition  a  loud 
speaker  in  operation.  How  could  he  be  sure  the  set  would 
work  at  that  time?  In  fact  what  he  got  was  simply  a  lot 
of  squeals  with  a  little  music  coming  through.  People  were 
still  working  in  the  laboratories  trying  to  send  music  over 
by  a  heterodyne  system.  A  violin  came  across  fairly  well. 
A  saxophone  was  not  bad.  But  the  two  together  sounded 
about  as  bad  as  one  could  imagine. 

When  we  look  at  this  situation  is  it  possible  to  believe 


i88  TELEVISION 

that  we  can  predict  too  much?  The  fact  that  wave-bands 
are  now  being  set  aside  by  the  Radio  Commission  for  tele- 
vision broadcasting  shows  how  seriously  the  subject  is  being 
taken.  There  can  be  no  doubt  that  television  of  moving 
pictures  will  soon  come  about.  This  brings  up  the  problem 
of  illumination  only  at  the  receiving  end,  instead  of  at  both 
ends.  But  one  broadcast  station  can  serve  many  receivers 
so  that  expense  need  not  be  spared  at  the  transmitting  end. 
With  searchlights  now  in  use  in  aviation  with  beam  candle- 
power  up  into  the  millions  we  need  hardly  worry  about 
this  point.  From  movies  to  actual  dramas  will  be  but  a 
short  jump. 

The  chief  difficulty  at  present  is  that  television  requires 
a  rather  broad  band  of  wave-lengths.  Had  television  come 
ten  years  ago  this  would  have  presented  no  difficulty.  As 
matters  stand  now,  however,  with  a  broadcast  station 
crowded  into  every  possible  space,  the  introduction  of  tele- 
vision will  of  necessity  crowd  some  of  these  out.  With  their 
enormous  commercial  possibility,  none  are  willing  to  drop 
out  for  the  general  good  of  the  future  of  television.  Here, 
perhaps,  lies  television's  greatest  obstacle.  It  is  probably 
greater  than  the  various  technical  obstacles  which  have  been 
presented  in  this  book.  In  the  meantime,  the  fact  that  there 
is  no  public  demand  for  television  magnifies  this  difficulty. 
If  the  public  knew  that  it  wanted  television,  if  there  would 
arise  a  vast  army  of  enthusiasts  such  as  those  who  built  one 
home-made  radio  set  after  another  a  few  years  ago,  then 
television  would  at  least  be  given  a  hearing.  But  now  a 
factory-made  set  is  so  much  superior  to  one  fabricated  at 
home  that  most  of  these  so-called  fans  have  disappeared. 
As  it  is  now  we  are  waiting  for  a  good  factory-built  tele- 
vision receiver.  But  will  this  come  without  public  demand? 
We  are  met  with  the  problem  of  public  demand  on  both 
sides  and  it  appears  that  this  will  only  come  as  a  result  of 
press  reports  of  laboratory  demonstrations.  It  will  be  a 


THE  FUTURE  OF  TELEVISION  189 

rather  slow  process.  Television  cannot  win  its  way  foot 
by  foot;  it  must  come  as  a  more  or  less  finished  product. 

Julius  Weinberger  of  the  Radio  Corporation  of  Amer- 
ica, speaking  before  the  Federal  Radio  Commission,  recently 
said: 

"If  the  public  is  interested  in  purchasing  picture  or  tele- 
vision receivers,  and  if  commercial  interests  are  desirous  of 
setting  up  a  service  along  these  lines,  it  will  be  possible  to 
set  up  and  develop  a  better  class  of  service  with  far  less 
interference  with  the  present  sound  broadcasting  art  if  visual 
broadcasting  service  is  placed  in  those  bands  above  1500 
kilocycles.  If  this  is  done  the  necessary  elements  of 
standardization  can  be  worked  out  at  a  reasonable  and 
thoughtful  pace  and  will  develop  so  as  to  be  of  the  greatest 
general  public  service." 

Other  speakers  before  the  Commission  were  reported 
by  the  New  York  Herald  Tribune  of  February  17,  1929 
as  follows : 

UM.  B.  Sleeper,  of  the  Sleeper  Research  Corporation, 
told  the  commission  that  television  is  no  more  annoying  than 
any  other  program  and  the  public  is  privileged  to  tune  off 
any  program  it  dislikes.  He  favored  television  programs 
in  the  broadcast  band,  and  stated  his  belief  that  if  sets  were 
on  the  market  the  public  would  buy  them.  Under  the 
present  conditions,  he  said,  most  of  those  who  have  sets  had 
to  make  them. 

"Declaring  that  engineers  developed  all  the  great  inven- 
tions and  that  statements  made  on  television  other  than  by 
engineers  are  of  little  value,  C.  W.  Horn,  manager  of  radio 
operations  of  the  Westinghouse  Electric  and  Manufacturing 
Company,  told  the  commission  that  television  will  have  no 
right  on  the  broadcast  bands  until  it  has  developed  so  that 
a  moving  picture  can  be  shown.  Television  is  now  in  the 
laboratories,  he  said,  and  not  ready  for  the  market,  intense 
research  work  still  being  necessary. 


190  TELEVISION 

"Oswald  Schuette,  executive  secretary  of  the  Radio  Pro- 
tective Association,  said  the  commission  could  do  everything 
possible  to  encourage  the  development  of  television.  He 
opposed  the  standardization  by  certain  groups  and  asked 
that  the  independent  manufacturer,  inventor  and  others  be 
given  a  free  hand  in  the  development  of  television.  Colonel 
Manton  Davis,  vice-president  and  general  counsel  of  the 
Radio  Corporation  of  America,  agreed  with  Mr.  Schuette 
that  'development  of  the  art  should  not  be  cramped.'  'Let 
us,  if  we  can  avoid  it,  not  develop  one  radio  art  at  the 
expense  of  another,'  Colonel  Davis  said." 

This  probably  gives  us  a  fair  picture  of  the  present  atti- 
tude toward  television  by  those  capable  of  passing  judgment 
upon  it. 

Another  difficulty  comes  in  the  lack  of  standardization. 
If  one  transmitter  is  working  with  a  scanning-disc  of  forty- 
eight  holes,  another  with  thirty-six,  two  receiving  discs 
would  be  needed.  To  shift  from  one  station  to  another 
we  should  have  to  change  the  discs  or  make  some  equivalent 
adjustment.  This  is  but  one  of  several  problems  which  lack 
of  standardization  presents.  On  the  other  hand,  standard- 
ization at  the  present  stage  is  dangerous.  It  is  extremely 
difficult  to  change  a  standard,  however  undesirable  it  may 
prove,  after  the  public  has  invested  thousands  of  dollars 
in  equipment. 

But  development  goes  on,  and  will  go  on.  There  is  no 
question  but  that  the  technical  difficulties  will  be  overcome. 
This  in  turn  will  overcome  the  other  difficulties  which  have 
been  outlined.  There  is  little  question  but  that  ten  years 
from  now  we  shall  receive  television  broadcasts  as  readily 
as  we  receive  radio  programs  today.  And  they  will  be  rela- 
tively as  satisfactory. 


INDEX 


Aberration,  chromatic,  25 

spherical,  25 
Aeo  light,  59,  63,  65 
Alexanderson,  E.  F.  W.,  84 
Alexanderson  projector,  166 
Alexanderson  system,  166 
Amateur  equipment,  179 
Amplifier,  Bell  system,   138 
Amplitude,  32 
Atomic  structure,  60 

Baird,  66,  81,  86 

color  television,  129 

daylight  television,   127 

J.  L.,  118 

optical  lever,  88 

synchronization,  98 
Baker,   101 

T.  Thome,  7,  43,  92 
Bakewell,  5 

Bartholomew,   H.   G.,  9,   102 
Bartlane,    10,    102 
Belin,  Edouard,  10,  18 
Bell,   synchronization,    100 
Bell  System,  132 

neon  tube,  145 

Blondel  oscillograph  (fig.  42),  74 
Braun  tube,  76 
Burt,  Dr.  R.  C.,  52 

Caesium  photoelectric  cell,  56 
Campbell-Swinton,  A.  A.,  18 
Cathode-ray  oscillograph,  70,  76 
Charbonnelle,  7 


Chemical  reproduction,  6 
Chromatic  aberration,  25 
Circuit,  neon  tube  control,  152 

synchronizing,  Bell,  154 
Code  system,   102 
Color-television,  66 

Baird,  129 
Cosine  law,  20 
Critical  angle,  27 

Dauvellier,   M.,   18 

scanning,  85 
Daylight  television,  58 
Daylight  transmitter,  Baird,  127 
Disc— Baird   lens,   119 

Baird  radial,   120 

Baird  spiral,  121 

prismatic,   160 
Disc  receiver,  Bell,  147 
Discharge  tube,  62 
Dispersion,   27 
Distributor,    Bell,   151 
Drum  scanner,  161 
DuFour  oscillograph,  75 

Einthoven  galvanometer,  73 
Eldridge-Green  theory,  28 
Electromagnetic   waves,   31 
Elster  and  Geitel,  50 
Equipment,  amateur,  179 
Ether,  36 
Eye,  19 

Fading,  143 


191 


192 


INDEX 


Ferree,  7 

Fluorescent  screens,  77 
Fournier,  81 
Framing,  99,  184 

Galvanometer,  Einthoven,  73 

moving  coil,  175 

moving  magnet,  177 
Geometrical   optics,  laws  of,   19 
"Ghosts,"  143 
Giltay,  41 
Glow  lamps,  59 
Governor,  fly-ball,  91 
Gray,  Frank,  139 
Grid  receiver,  Bell,  148 

Half-tone,  8 
Hallwachs,  47 
Heaviside  layer,  145 
Hertz,  46 
Historical,  5 
Horton,  J.  W.,  139 
"Hunting"  of  an  electric  motor, 
96 

Inverse  square  law,  19 
Ives,   Herbert  E.,  132 

Jenkins,  89 

Jenkins,  C.  Francis,  18,  159 

Jenkins,  drum,  160 

Radio-movies,  162 

synchronization,  165 
Jenkins  system,  159 
Johnson,  J.  B,,  53,  76 

Kino  lamp,  63,  etc. 
Knowles  relay,  178 
Knudson,  Hans,  15 
Korn,  101 
Korn,  Prof.  Arthur,  11,  41 


Lag-selenium  cell,  42 
Lambert's  cosine  law,  20 
Left-hand  rule,  71 
Leishman,  L.  J.,  10 
Lenard,  48 
Lens  disc,  119 
Lens,  convex,  24 

faults,  25 

formula,  25 
Light,  velocity  of,  34 
Lorenz-Korn,  15 

McFarlane,  Capt.  M.  D.,  102 
MacFarlane   Moore,   D,   18,  59 
McFarlane,  M.  L.  D.,  9 
Mattes,  R.  C.,  139 
Maxwell-Clerk,  35 
Mercury  vapor  tube,  63 
Mirror,  concave,  21 
Mirror-drum,  Alexanderson,  167 
Moving  coil  galvanometer,  175 
Moving    magnet    galvanometer, 

177 

Morton,  E.  R.,  157 
Mounting,   amateur   equipment, 

131 
Multiplex  radio  system,  155 

Neon  tube,  63 

Bell  type,  145 

Neon  tube  control  circuit,  152 
Non-polarized  relays,  175 

Optical  lever,  Baird,  88 
Optical  systems,  19 
Oscillograph-cathode  ray,  76,  90 

Du  Four,  75 

string,  73 
Oscillographs,  71 

Pendulum,  91 


INDEX 


193 


Phonic  drum,  97 
Phonovisor,  130 
Photoelectric  cell,  46 

caesium,  56 

circuits,  57 

Photoelectric  cells,  Bell,  136 
Picture  transmitter,  Bell  system, 

109 

Piersol,  R.  J.,  44 
Planck,  38 
Polarized  relays,  175 
Prism,   total   reflecting,   27 
Prismatic   disc,   90 
Prismatic  ring,  159 
Process  screen,  8 
Projector,  Alexanderson,  166 

Quantum,  38 

Radial  disc,   120 

Westinghouse,  182 
Radio-movies,  Jenkins,  162 
Radiovisor,  165 
Ranger,  R.  H.,  16,  94,  105 

receiver,   106 
Rankine,  A.  O.,  44 
Real  image,  22 
Reflection,  internal,  27 

law  of,  20 

Refraction,  law  of,  21 
Relay,  Knowles',  178 
Relays,  173 

non-polarized,  175 

polarized,  175 

telegraph,  175 

tuned,  177 
Retina,  28 
Rignoux,  81 
Romer,  34 
Ruhmer,  17,  81 


Scanner,  drum,  161 
Scanning,  81 

Scanning-disc  motor,  Bell,  152 
Scanning  spot  distortion,  139 
Scanning  system,  Alexanderson, 
84 

Baird,  86,  122 

Dauvillier,  85 

Jenkins,  89 

oscillograph,  85 

system,  simple,  83 

tuning  fork,  85 
Selenium  cell,  39 

lag  of,  12 

Selenium,  lag  of,  42 
Sensation,    relation   to   stimula- 
tion, 29 

Seven-spot  projector,  167 
Spectrum,  chart  of,  35 
Spherical  aberration,  25 
Spiral  disc,  121 
Stoletow,  49 
Stoller,  H.,  157 
String  oscillograph,  73 
Stroboscope,  96 
Swinton,   A.  A.   Campbell,  78 
Synchronization,  91 

Baird,  98 

Bell,  100,  150 

Jenkins,  165 

Synchronizing  circuit,  Bell,  154 
Sychronizing  system,  Baird,  123 
Synchronous  motors,  97 

Telectograph,  7 
Telephotography,  101 
Thomson,  J.  J.  48,  76 
Transatlantic   transmission,    131 
Tuned  relays,  177 
Tuning  fork,  electrical,  93 


194 


INDEX 


Virtual  image,  21 
Visual  contrast,  70 
Visual-purple,  28 

Wave  formula,  32 
Wave-length,  32 
Waves,  31 
transverse,  32 


Westinghouse    facsimile    trans- 
mitter, 107 

Westinghouse  radio-movies,  182 
Wire  television,  140 
Work,  101 

Zworykin,  53,  107,  112 


TIMELY  TOPICS  FOR  TELEVISION 
AND  RADIO  ENTHUSIASTS 

STORAGE  BATTERIES 

By  MORTON  ARENDT,  E.E.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering, 

Columbia  University,  Fellow,  American  Institute  of  Electrical  Engineering. 

Such  material  as  can  be  readily  applied  to  every-day  problems  relating  to  the 

manufacture  and  assembling  of  storage  batteries,  to  questions  having  to  do  with 

their  upkeep  and  care,  and  to  their  application  and  usage  comprise  the  scope  of 

this  book. 

290  Pages  Cloth  6^X9^  Illustrated  $4.50 

RADIO 

By  ELMER  E.  BURNS,  Instructor  in  Physics,  Austin  High  School,  Chicago. 
Radio  theories  and  principles  are  dealt  with  in  this  book  in  a  simple  style. 
The  mathematics  employed  is  not  hard,  and  all  electrical  discussions  are  in 
terms  of  the  electronic  theory. 

266  Pages  Cloth  5^X8  Illustrated  $2.00 

MATHEMATICS  FOR  THE  PRACTICAL  MAN 

By  GEORGE  HOWE,  M.E. 

Explaining  quickly  and  simply  all  the  elements  of  algebra,  geometry,  trigo- 
nometry, co-ordinate  geometry,  and  calculus. 
143  Pages  Cloth  5X7^2  Diagrams  $1.50 

PHYSICS  FOR  COLLEGES 

By  H.  H.  SHELDON,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics  and  Chairman  of  the 
Department,  Washington  Square  College,  New  York  University,  C.  V. 
KENT,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics,  University  of  Kansas,  C.  W.  MILLER, 
Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Physics,  Brown  University,  and  R.  F.  PATON, 
Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Physics,  University  of  Illinois. 
Here  is  a  text  that  merges  the  old  physics  with  the  new.  There  are  discussions 

of  the  electron  theory  of  electricity,  the  principles  of  radioactivity  are  reviewed, 

and  modern  theories  of  radiation  are  studied.     Difficult  mathematics  has  been 

avoided,  nothing  higher  than  algebra  is  employed. 

653  Pages  Cioth  5^X8%  Illustrated  $3.75 

THE  RADIO  MANUAL 

By  GEORGE  E.  STERLING,  Radio  Inspector  and  Examining  Officer,  United 
States  Department  of  Commerce.  Edited  by  ROBERT  S.  KRUSE,  B.S., 
Formerly  Technical  Editor  QST,  Magazine  of  American  Radio  Relay 
League;  Consultant  for  Development  of  Short  Wave  Devices,  Technical 
Editor  and  Writer. 

It  answers  all  questions  on  the  installation,  upkeep,  operation,  and  control  of 
radio  apparatus  and  equipment — broadcasting,  transmitang,  and  receiving. 
666  Pages  Semi  Flexible  Fabrikoid       sJsXS   Illustrated       $6.00 

SWOOPE'S  LESSONS  IN  PRACTICAL  ELECTRICITY 

By  ERICH  HAUSMANN,  E.E.,  Sc.D.,  Professor  of  Physics  at  the  Polytechnic 
Institute  of  Brooklyn  and  Fellow  of  the  American  Institute  of  Electrical 
Engineers. 

The  uses  of  D-C  and  A-C  machinery  in  the  industry  are  discussed.     Electro- 
magnetism  and  its  theories  are  fully  treated.     Facts  are  given  on  electric  light- 
ing, vacuum  tubes,  telegraphy,  radio,  precision  instruments,  and  many  other 
electrical  subjects  of  every-day  importance. 
694  Pages  Cloth  5>£X8  Illustrated  $2.50 

Van  Nostrand  books  sent  post  paid  on  approval  to  residents  of  the  United  States 
and  Canada.     General  Catalog  sent  free  upon  request